WCDMA Network Planning and Optimization Course

WO_100_E1 WCDMA wireless
Network Planning and Optimization

Course Objectives
Understand the basic principles and composition of antenna.
Understand the basic principles and composition of antenna.
Understand antenna installation projects.
Master the model selection methods of antennae, and can select
antennae reasonably according to the geographical and physical
nature of the scenario.

Reference
Radio Technology Performance Indices and Technical White
Paper
References of WCDMA Radio Communication System Antenna
Manual
WCDMA Outdoor Antenna Model Selection Textbook
Antenna Basics

i ii i
Contents
1 WCDMA network planning ...................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Features of WCDMA Technology..................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 Distinguishing Channels With Code ...................................................................................... 1
1.1.2 Self-infection System............................................................................................................. 2
1.1.3 Providing Multi-rate Diversified Services ............................................................................. 2
1.1.4 Soft Capacity.......................................................................................................................... 2
1.1.5 Other Features ........................................................................................................................ 3
1.2 low Chart........................................................................................................................................... 3
1.3 Description of Network Planning Process ........................................................................................ 4
1.3.1 Pre-research of Project ........................................................................................................... 4
1.3.2 Demand Analysis ................................................................................................................... 4
1.3.3 Scale Estimation and Pre-planning Emulation....................................................................... 5
1.3.4 Plan of Survey........................................................................................................................ 5
1.3.5 Site Survey, Propagation Model Test and Noise Test............................................................. 6
1.3.6 Site Filtering........................................................................................................................... 7
1.3.7 Topology Design .................................................................................................................... 7
1.3.8 Dummy Topology Selection................................................................................................... 8
1.3.9 Report Submission ................................................................................................................. 8
1.4 Reports of Network Planning............................................................................................................ 8
2 WCDMA Coverage Estimation................................................................................................................. 9
2.1 Radio Propagation Model ................................................................................................................. 9
2.1.1 Free Space Propagation Loss ................................................................................................. 9
2.1.2 Propagation Model ............................................................................................................... 10

ii ii ii ii
2.2 Link Budget .....................................................................................................................................12
2.2.1 Basic Link Budget Parameters..............................................................................................13
2.2.2 Unlink Budget.......................................................................................................................22
2.2.3 Uplink/Downlink Balance ....................................................................................................23
2.3 Coverage Scale Estimation..............................................................................................................24
2.3.1 Calculation of BS Coverage Radius .....................................................................................24
2.3.2 Calculation of BS Coverage Area.........................................................................................25
2.3.3 Scale Calculation ..................................................................................................................26
3 WCDMA Capacity Estimation ................................................................................................................27
3.1 Capacity Estimation Flow................................................................................................................27
3.2 Estimation Method of Hybrid Service Capacity..............................................................................27
3.2.1 Equivalent Erlang Method....................................................................................................28
3.2.2 Post Erlang-B Method ..........................................................................................................29
3.2.3 Campbell Method .................................................................................................................30
3.3 Uplink Capacity Estimation.............................................................................................................33
3.3.1 Load Analysis for Uplink......................................................................................................33
3.3.2 Uplink Capacity and Scale Estimation .................................................................................36
3.4 Downlink Capacity Estimation........................................................................................................38
3.4.1 Analysis of Downlink Load ..................................................................................................38
3.4.2 Downlink Capacity and Scale Estimation.............................................................................41
4 Survey of Network Planning....................................................................................................................43
4.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................43
4.2 Selection of Base Site ......................................................................................................................43
4.2.1 Method of Selecting Site.......................................................................................................43
4.2.2 Policy of Selecting Site.........................................................................................................47
4.2.3 Mitigation in Site Selection ..................................................................................................48

iii iii iii iii
4.3 Collection of WCDMA Networking Planning Data........................................................................ 51
4.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................. 51
4.3.2 Project Information .............................................................................................................. 51
4.3.3 Categorization of Coverage Area ......................................................................................... 52
4.3.4 Collection of Existing Resources ......................................................................................... 53
4.3.5 Information of Important Transportation Line ..................................................................... 54
4.3.6 Information of Important Buildings in Urban Areas............................................................ 54
4.3.7 Information of Sites on the Existing Network...................................................................... 54
4.4 Identification of Base Model........................................................................................................... 55
4.4.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................. 55
4.4.2 Requirement Analysis .......................................................................................................... 55
4.5 Introduction to Base Stations .......................................................................................................... 57
4.5.1 Macro BS ............................................................................................................................. 57
4.5.2 Micro Cell Base Station ....................................................................................................... 60
4.5.3 Remote Radio Station........................................................................................................... 62
4.5.4 Repeater ............................................................................................................................... 63
4.5.5 Others................................................................................................................................... 65
4.6 Networking Schemes in Typical Surroundings ............................................................................... 66
4.6.1 Basic Coverage in Urban Areas and Traffic-Dense Areas.................................................... 66
4.6.2 Coverage in Suburb and Countryside................................................................................... 67
4.6.3 Coverage in Particular Surroundings ................................................................................... 68
4.6.4 Coverage along Freeway and Railway................................................................................. 69
5 Tools using in the Survey of Network Planning..................................................................................... 71
5.1 GPS Principle & Application .......................................................................................................... 71
5.1.1 GPS Structure....................................................................................................................... 71
5.1.2 GPS Principles ..................................................................................................................... 71

iv iv iv iv
5.1.3 Name and Function of the GPS Panel Keys .........................................................................71
5.1.4 Basic Operations...................................................................................................................72
5.1.5 Basic Information .................................................................................................................74
5.1.6 Navigation Operation............................................................................................................77
5.1.7 Function Setting....................................................................................................................78
5.1.8 Performance Specifications ..................................................................................................80
5.2 Principle and Application of a Laser Rangefinder...........................................................................81
5.2.1 Name and Function of the Panel Keys on a Laser Rangefinder ...........................................81
5.2.2 Operation Description...........................................................................................................82
5.2.3 Function................................................................................................................................89
5.2.4 Technical Parameters ............................................................................................................98
5.2.5 Signal ....................................................................................................................................99
5.2.6 Maintenance..........................................................................................................................99
5.3 Use and Selection of Digital Camera.............................................................................................100
5.3.1 Brief Introduction ...............................................................................................................100
5.3.2 Specifications......................................................................................................................100
5.4 Compass Use Specifications..........................................................................................................102
5.4.1 Structure of a Compass .......................................................................................................102
5.4.2 Basic Operations.................................................................................................................103
5.4.3 Precautions..........................................................................................................................105
6 The Propagation model test and correction..........................................................................................107
6.1 Propagation Model Test Operation Process...................................................................................107
6.2 Test Procedures..............................................................................................................................108
6.2.1 Equipment Preparation .......................................................................................................108
6.2.2 Testing Site Selection..........................................................................................................108
6.2.3 Testing Route Selection ...................................................................................................... 111

v vv v
6.2.4 Test Environment Preparations .......................................................................................... 114
6.2.5 Test Result Processing........................................................................................................ 121
6.3 WCDMA Propagation model tuning............................................................................................. 126
6.3.1 Inputs for Propagation model tuning.................................................................................. 126
6.3.2 WCDMA Propagation model tuning Process..................................................................... 127
6.3.3 Preprocessing Test Data ..................................................................................................... 128
6.3.4 Selecting Propagation model.............................................................................................. 131
6.3.5 Transmission Model Tuning............................................................................................... 147
6.3.6 Propagation Model Tuning Result...................................................................................... 154
7 The Principal and Selection of Antenna............................................................................................... 155
7.1 Overview of Base Station Antennae.............................................................................................. 155
7.1.1 Development of Industry Technologies of BS Antennae ................................................... 155
7.1.2 Technical and Market Situations of Chinese Antenna Enterprises..................................... 155
7.1.3 Competitive Advantages of Foreign Antenna Enterprises.................................................. 156
7.1.4 Development Direction of Antenna Industry ..................................................................... 156
7.2 Principles of Antenna Radiation.................................................................................................... 157
7.2.1 Electromagnetic Wave Radiation ....................................................................................... 157
7.2.2 Symmetrical 1/2 wavelength Dipole.................................................................................. 158
7.3 Internal Structure and Classification of Common BS Antennae and Indoor Antennae................. 159
7.3.1 Directional Patch Dipole BS Antennae .............................................................................. 159
7.3.2 Omni Serial Feeding BS Antennae..................................................................................... 162
7.4 Concept and Significance of Antenna Technical Parameters ........................................................ 163
7.4.1 Gain of Antenna ................................................................................................................. 163
7.5 Antenna Radiation Pattern............................................................................................................. 164
7.6 Lobe Width.................................................................................................................................... 166
7.6.1 Horizontal Lobe Width....................................................................................................... 167

vi vi vi vi
7.6.2 Vertical Lobe Width............................................................................................................168
7.7 1.1 Working Frequency Range of the Antenna..............................................................................168
7.8 Polarization Modes ........................................................................................................................169
7.9 Downtilt Mode...............................................................................................................................170
7.10 Front/Back Ratio of Antenna .......................................................................................................171
7.11 Input Impedance of Antenna, Zin ................................................................................................172
7.12 Antenna VSWR...........................................................................................................................172
7.13 Side Lobe Suppression and Zero Filling......................................................................................173
7.14 IM 3rd Order................................................................................................................................174
7.15 Isolation between Ports................................................................................................................174
5.4 Radio Parameters of Antenna ........................................................................................................175
7.16 Antenna Radiation Pattern ...........................................................................................................175
7.17 Gain of Antenna...........................................................................................................................176
7.18 Input Impedance of Antenna, Zin ................................................................................................177
7.19 Antenna VSWR...........................................................................................................................178
7.20 Antenna Polarization....................................................................................................................178
7.21 Front/Back Ratio of Antenna .......................................................................................................179
7.22 Azimuth Angle of Antenna ..........................................................................................................179
7.23 Antenna Height ............................................................................................................................180
7.24 Downtilt Mode.............................................................................................................................180
5.7 Classification of Antenna...............................................................................................................181
7.25 Antenna Parameter Examples ......................................................................................................181
7.26 Antenna Model Selection.............................................................................................................183
7.27 Classification of Antenna Application Scenarios.........................................................................184
7.27.1 High-density Urban Areas ................................................................................................184
7.27.2 General Areas (Cities and Towns) ....................................................................................184

vii vii vii vii
7.27.3 Suburb (Township) and Countryside................................................................................ 184
7.27.4 Railways and Express Highways (Highways).................................................................. 184
7.27.5 Scenery Spots................................................................................................................... 185
7.28 Antenna Model Selection............................................................................................................ 185
7.28.1 Basic Principles of Antenna Model Selection.................................................................. 185
7.28.2 High-density Urban Areas................................................................................................ 186
7.28.3 General Urban Areas........................................................................................................ 188
7.28.4 Suburb, Twonships, and Countryside............................................................................... 189
7.28.5 Railways and Express Highways (Highways).................................................................. 190
7.28.6 Scenery Spots................................................................................................................... 192
7.29 Type Library of WCDMA Antennae........................................................................................... 194
7.29.1 Collection of WCDMA Outdoor Omni Antennae............................................................ 194
7.29.2 Collection of WCDMA Outdoor Directional Antennae ................................................... 198
7.29.3 Collection of WCDMA Indoor Omni Antennae............................................................... 200
7.29.4 Collection of WCDMA Indoor Directional Antennae...................................................... 202
7.30 Antenna Installation Specifications............................................................................................. 204
7.31 Antenna Installation .................................................................................................................... 204
7.31.1 Pole Installation................................................................................................................ 205
7.31.2 Tower Installation Mode .................................................................................................. 205
7.32 BS Antenna Structure and Connection........................................................................................ 206
7.33 BS Antenna Installation............................................................................................................... 208
7.33.1 Considerations.................................................................................................................. 208
7.33.2 Outdoor Directional Antenna Installation ........................................................................ 209
7.33.3 Outdoor Omni Antenna Installation ................................................................................. 211
7.33.4 Indoor Antenna Installation.............................................................................................. 211
7.33.5 Jumper Installation........................................................................................................... 213

viii viii viii viii
7.33.6 Lightning Arrester Installation..........................................................................................214
7.33.7 Grounding kit Installation.................................................................................................216
7.34 Antenna Feeder System Debugging.............................................................................................217
7.34.1 Prerequisites......................................................................................................................217
7.34.2 Debugging Procedure .......................................................................................................218
7.35 Connector Sealing........................................................................................................................218
8 WCDMA Radio Network Optimization Process and Technology......................................................219
8.1 Service Consideration of Network Optimization...........................................................................219
8.2 Reasons for Network Optimization ...............................................................................................219
8.3 Types of Network Optimization.....................................................................................................220
8.3.1 Engineering Optimization...................................................................................................220
8.3.2 O&M Optimization.............................................................................................................220
8.4 Optimization Workflow.................................................................................................................221
8.5 Optimization Steps.........................................................................................................................223
8.5.1 Preparation..........................................................................................................................223
8.5.2 Frequency Spectrum Scanning (Optional)..........................................................................224
8.5.3 Calibration Test (Optional) .................................................................................................224
8.5.4 Network Data Collection ....................................................................................................225
8.5.5 Data Analysis ......................................................................................................................237
8.5.6 Parameter Check (Optional) ...............................................................................................256
8.5.7 Problem Localization..........................................................................................................257
8.5.8 Formulation of the Optimization Plan ................................................................................261
8.5.9 Implementation of the Optimization Plan...........................................................................264
8.5.10 Optimization Effect Verification.......................................................................................264
8.5.11 Project Acceptance............................................................................................................265
8.5.12 Document Archiving.........................................................................................................265

ix ix ix ix

1 11 1
1 WCDMA network planning
1.1 Features of WCDMA Technology
The features of WCDMA technology determine the characteristics, difficulties, and
solutions of WCDMA network planning. Therefore, we use the features of WCDMA
technology as the clue to introduce the features of WCDMA and the related
characteristics of network planning.
1.1.1 Distinguishing Channels With Code
In the WCDMA system, all the subscribers in each carrier share the frequency, time,
and power resources. Feature codes (scrambles and channel codes) are used in statistic
processing of signals to distinguish channels. That is the so-called CDMA technology.
A channel in the WCDMA system does not occupy a band or time segment alone. The
transmitting end sends signal sequences according to the patterns of feature codes. The
receiving end measures and calculates the signals received according to the same
patterns of feature codes. If the feature code selected has good self-correlation and
cross-correlation, when there is signals for the local channel, the statistic result will be
expressed as high peak, and the effect of other channels will be attenuated. Thus, the
channels in the system can be distinguished. Therefore, in the WCDMA system, there
is feature code planning instead of frequency planning.
A WCDMA channel is composed of three parts, namely data stream, channel code
sequence, and scramble sequence. The channels must have at least one different
channel code and scramble. For the forward channels, different scrambles are used to
distinguish different cells. The channels in a cell are distinguished by different channel
codes. To ensure the isolation of cells, adjacent cells are not allowed to use the same
scramble. Pay attention to this point during network planning. Because there are
abundant code resources in reverse links, the scramble of each subscriber is different.
Thanks to CDMA and QPSK modulation technology, WCDMA systems have higher
spectrum utilization than analog systems and GSM systems. Under the same condition,
the CDMA system bears much more subscribers.
WO_100_E1 WCDMA wireless Network Planning and Optimization
2 22 2
1.1.2 Self-infection System
Because the channels of the WCDMA system share the same frequency, time, and
power resources, the channels are isolated by the orthogonality of the feature codes
measured. However, the orthogonality of the feature codes is not good enough. As a
result, the channel isolation in the WCDMA system is not as good as that in FDMA and
TDMA. In addition, the more the channels are used, the stronger the interference from
other channels will be. Therefore, when the link quality is guaranteed, the transmit
power must be as low as possible. It makes the power planning an important part in
WCDMA network planning.
1.1.3 Providing Multi-rate Diversified Services
The WCDMA system can provide flexible and diversified services to subscribers. That
is an important feature of WCDMA. Under the same transmission environment, the
WCDMA is requested to provide different transmission rates, for example, it can
provide 144kbps in high-speed moving, 384kbps in walking condition, and 2Mbps
indoors. The WCDMA system also supports variable rate services, mixed services,
high speed data packet services (multimedia services), and uplink/downlink rate
asymmetric services (Internet access). Considering the service expansion in the future,
the WCDMA system also provides large capacity and data bearer capability with
flexible rate matching. To describe the QoS of the above services, parameters such as
data rate, BER, transit delay, and delay jitter are defined.
In conclusion, the single Erlang model cannot accurately describe the service demands
of subscribers in the WCDMA system. A more complicated service model must be
used.
1.1.4 Soft Capacity
The system capacity refers to the maximum number of subscribers that the system
supports at the same time.
The capacity of a WCDMA system is measured by two aspects, hard capacity and soft
capacity. The hard capacity refers to the number of channels that the Node B allocates
to each cell (it is determined by the number of baseband channels and frequency
resources). Same as the 2G system, it determines the maximum number of calls that a
cell can handle at the same time.
Chapter Error! Style not defined. Error! Style not defined.
3 33 3
The limit of soft capacity depends on the self-infection feature and the support of
diversified services of the CDMA system. The system can deny the access of new
subscribers to reduce interference and ensure QoS. In the same way, the system may
permit the application of low-rate services and reject the high-rate services for the
consideration of resources. When the network traffic is heavy, the system may decrease
the quality of certain service to reduce resource occupation. All of these should be
expressed by system soft capacity. The number of subscribers allowed to access due to
interference or limited power, or the total data throughput ratio is not fixed. It is closely
related to radio environment, and service composition and ratio. With the development
of ASIC technology, the system processing capability is no longer the bottleneck of
capacity. The soft capacity ultimately determines the system capability.
To operators, the benefits of soft capacity is that it can balance the QoS and system
capacity within a certain degree, and dynamically adjust the ratio of various service
based on the maximum economic effect. However, the soft capacity causes difficulty in
capacity planning during network planning. In the WCDMA system, the capacity
planning is the most difficult step.
1.1.5 Other Features
Other technology features of the WCDMA system may also affect the network
planning, for example, the soft handover. The soft handover can bring extra gain to the
system and expand coverage. New technologies such as antenna diversity, intelligent
antenna, and multi-user detection will enhance system performance. If these
technologies are used in the system, the possible influence caused by these factors must
be considered during network planning.
1.2 low Chart
The following figure shows the process of network planning.
4 44 4

Fig. 1.2-1 Network Planning Flowchart
1.3 Description of Network Planning Process
1.3.1 Pre-research of Project
Upon the request of the operator, ZTE engineers (M&S personnel and network
planning engineers) should reach an agreement with the operator on network planning
process and working interface. The operator should provide necessary data for network
planning. The network planning can be started only after both sides sign on the
contents mutually agreed.
1.3.2 Demand Analysis
Adequate communication before network planning is essential to the subsequent work.
Prior to network planning, collect the basic information of the Node B in current
network and nail down the resources that the operator can provide, such as electronic
map, transmission resources, and equipment room conditions.
According to the requests of the operator, determine the planning of the coverage area
and corresponding subscriber density distribution, the planning of service areas, and
the target of the network planning.
5 55 5
Analyze customer demands according to the requests of the operator. Learn the culture
and physiognomy of the area to be planned, explore the traffic distribution, and provide
the planning strategy that meets the coverage, capacity, and QoS requested by the
operator.
Conduct field survey in the key coverage area with accompany of the operator. Use
GPS to learn the location and area of the coverage field. Use the traffic distribution
data of the current network to guide the planning of the network to be constructed.
According to the Node B information provided, make good preparation for emulation.
In the stage of demand analysis, submit XXX (service area name) Network Planning
Requirements and Data Collection Sheet and 3G Network Planning Requirements and
Assessment Sheet.
1.3.3 Scale Estimation and Pre-planning Emulation
After estimating the network scale of the service area, determine the number of Nodes
B and the density of Node B. Use the special emulation software to verify the
estimated result of the network scale.
Through emulation, verify whether the number of Nodes B and the density of Node B
can meet the requirements of system coverage and capacity, and whether the mixed
services can meet the QoS.
The emulation not only verifies the number and density of Nodes B but also provides
Node B layout as well as the approximate area and location of the pre-selected site of
Nodes B.
Combine the pre-planning emulation results with the results of the demand analysis,
and prepare a complete planning report.
Output Report on XXX (service area name) Network Pre-planning.
1.3.4 Plan of Survey
Based on the results of emulation and the field survey period requested by the operator,
obtain the workload of the survey.
According to the workload of the survey, make the survey plan, determine the leader
and members of the field survey team, settle down the start time and end time, and
prepare the equipment for field survey.
6 66 6
Assign the survey task to the leader of the field survey. The leader of the filed survey
should submit the XXX (service area or pilot network name) Survey Plan. The leader
of the filed survey should report the survey progress of each day in the Daily Report on
XX (service area name) Survey Progress. With the daily report, the home office can
learn the progress of the survey and provide necessary HR and material support in
time.
1.3.5 Site Survey, Propagation Model Test and Noise Test
The noise test is unnecessary for the use of legal frequency. However, to ensure the
network performance and detect the possible interference in time, noise test can be
performed on the sites selected according to the Specification of Noise Test in Network
Planning. If noise test is requested, output the Report on Noise Test in XXX (service
area name).
It must be clearly declared in the report that the noise test is not the specialty of ZTE,
and the equipment used is not the special equipment for noise test. Therefore, if
interference is detected, the interference exists. However, due to the factors such as
directional property, time, and test height of the interference, it does not mean the
interference does not exist if no interference is detected.
Conduct noise test during the site survey. The test results can be attached to the site
survey sheet. Noise test report is not required.
According to the Specification of Propagation Model Site Selection, the emulation
owner selects the site for the test of propagation model. The emulation test site is
similar to the planned site. The survey engineers take photons and collect radio data at
the test sits selected by the emulation owner. The test engineers determine the test paths
and conduct the test according to the Specification of Selecting the Paths for
Propagation Model Test. Based on the correction model of the electrical measurement
data, the emulation engineers obtain the propagation model under the environment of
the planned area.
Determine the propagation model test environment as follows: dense urban area,
ordinary urban area, suburb and town, and rural area.
Output Propagation Model Test Site Survey Report, Propagation Model Test Report,
and Propagation Model Correction Report.
Site survey of the planned area
7 77 7
The site survey is an important part of the network planning.
The survey engineers must conduct site survey and collect data carefully to ensure the
validity and accuracy of the survey data. The site survey is essential to the network
emulation and construction as well as the network optimization.
Select the sites for field survey: take the site survey of China Mobile as an example.
Select the sites provided according to the field survey results and emulation. Select the
proper site meeting the requirements of WCDMA networking, and build up network
structure on it.
Plan the site survey: For China Tietong and China Netcom that cannot provide sites for
field survey, the survey engineers should find more than three candidate sites about 50
m around the major coverage area after determining the planned area. The candidate
sites must comply with the site selection specification. Select the sites for field survey
from the candidate sites by the means of emulation.
The survey owner should assign a person to complete the XXX (service area name)
Node B Survey Sheet, ensuring that the survey sheet is filled and the survey data is
checked on a daily basis. At the end of the survey, the survey owner submits a survey
report and summarizes the survey completed.
1.3.6 Site Filtering
According to the field survey results, test results and pre-planning emulation results,
select the sites. For the site that cannot be determined, provide the information of
several candidate sites to the home office for analysis and decision-making.
1.3.7 Topology Design
The task of this phase is to determine the type and network structure of the sites
selected. Determine the type of the site according to the requirements of coverage and
capacity, and then design a reasonable network topology. When designing the site
distribution, select network units according to the factors such as topography,
physiognomy, coverage, capacity, and equipment room conditions. The common
network elements include macro cell, micro cell, remote deploy of RF module, and
repeater. These NEs will bring good effect when applied in network construction.
8 88 8
1.3.8 Dummy Topology Selection
The emulation engineers enter the data collected in the site survey in the emulation
software, perform emulation of the candidate solutions, and then select the best
solution.
1.3.9 Report Submission
The project owner submits the final network planning and design report according to
the site survey report, propagation model correction test results, and emulation results.
1.4 Reports of Network Planning
The following reports are output during network planning:
1. XX (service area name) Network Planning Requirements Analysis Report
2. XXX (service area name) Pre-planning Emulation Report
The emulation results can be attached to the pre-planning report.
3. XXX (service area name) Survey Plan
It contains the members of the survey team and the preparation of equipment.
4. Statement of XXX (service area name) Survey
After discussing with the operator, the survey owner submits this document
before the site survey. This documents describes the actual survey tasks in the
site survey.
5. Daily Report on XXX (service area name) Survey
6. XXX (service area name) Survey Report
The summary report submitted after the site survey is completed. The survey
sheet can be attached to the report.
7. Report on Noise Test in XXX (service area name)
If the operator requests the report, submit it. If not, the report can be submitted
as an attachment of the survey report.
8. XXX (service area name) Radio network Planning Report
Use the emulation tool to select the site from the candidate sites.

9 99 9
2 WCDMA Coverage Estimation
2.1 Radio Propagation Model
2.1.1 Free Space Propagation Loss
Because of propagation path and landform interference, propagation signals are
decreased, which is known as propagation loss. In the space propagation, many factors
enter into radio wave loss, including ground absorption, reflection, refraction and
diffraction. In the case that radio wave is propagated in free space (homogeneous
medium with isotropy, imbibition and electric conductivity as zero), the above factors
are uncertain. However, it does not mean that there is no propagation loss of radio
wave in free space. After radio wave is propagated for a certain distance, it may also be
attenuated due to radiant energy diffusion (also called attenuation or loss).
When the transmitter whose transmission power is Pt eradiates radio signals through
isotropy antenna with gain as Gt, the signal power density Sr is:
2
4 d
Gt Pt
S
r
=
The signal power Pr received by the antenna with gain as Gr is:
Ar Sr = Pr
Where, Ar stands for the effective receiving area of antenna,
4
2
=
Gr
Ar
then,
( )
2
2
4
Pr
d
Gr Gt Pt

Pt refers to the power from transmitter to transmit antenna.
refers to the electromagnetic wave length.
d refers to the distance between transmit and receive antennas.
Gt refers to the transmit antenna gain.
Gr refers to the receive antenna gain.
10 10 10 10
The propagation loss is defined as the ratio of power from transmitter to transmit
antenna to power received by receive antenna:
( )
2
2
4
Pr
= =
Gr Gt
d Pt
Loss
Path loss is measured by dB, then space propagation loss (Loss) is:
( )
( ) ( ) Gr Gt
d
Gr Gt
d
Loss lg 10 lg 10
4
lg 20
4
lg 10
2
2

|
\
|
=

Propagation loss of free space (Free Loss) is:
|
\
|
=
d
Loss
4
lg 20
If and d are measured by Km and f is measured by MHz, the common
formula is:
f d FreeLoss lg 20 lg 20 44 . 32 + + =
From the above formula, we can see that the larger the distance (d) between transmit
antenna and receive antenna, and the larger the radio wave frequency (f), the larger the
free space loss. When d or f is doubled, the propagation loss of free space will be
increased by 6 dB.
2.1.2 Propagation Model
While planning and constructing a mobile communication network, you have to make
detailed study about electric wave propagation features and field strength prediction
before determining frequency band, frequency allocation and radio wave coverage,
calculating communication probability and inter-system electromagnetic interference,
and finally defining radio equipment parameters. The radio propagation model is a
mathematic formula of such variables as radio propagation loss and frequency, distance,
environment and antenna height concluded by theory study and practical test. In the
radio network planning, the radio propagation model presents the designer an
approximate propagation effect in the practical propagation environment to estimate
the space propagation loss. Therefore, the propagation model veracity determines
whether the cell planning is reasonable.
Radio propagation environments on the earth surface diversify a lot and propagation
models in different propagation environments are differentiated a lot, too. Therefore,
11 11 11 11
the propagation environment plays an important role in setting up a radio propagation
model. The propagation environment in a special region consists of the following
factors:
Terrains (mountains, hills, plain or water area)
Number, height, distribution and material features of buildings
Vegetation features
Weather conditions
Natural or man-made electromagnetic noise
Working frequency of system
Movement of mobile station
Propagation model is usually classified into outdoor propagation model and indoor
propagation model. The frequently-used models are shown in Table 2.1-1.
Table 2.1-1 Common Propagation Models
Model Name Frequency Range
Okumura-Hata 150 MHz1500 MHz macro cell prediction
Cost231-Hata 150 MHz2000 MHz macro cell prediction
Cost231 Walfish-Ikegami 800 MHz2000 MHz micro cell prediction
Keenan-Motley 900 MHz and 1800 MHz indoor environment prediction
General model 150 MHz2000 MHz macro cell prediction
The Cost231-Hata model and the General model used in the network planning software
Aircom are described below.
The Cost231-Hata model is applicable for 150 MHz2000 MHz macro cell prediction.
The urban path loss value can be worked out with the following approximate analysis
formula:
( )
m m b b
C Ah d h h f Pathloss + + + = lg lg 55 . 6 9 . 44 log 82 . 13 lg 9 . 33 3 . 46
Where, f refers to carrier, unit: MHz, applicable for 150 MHz2000 MHz;
b
h refers to BS antenna height, unit: m, effective height 30 m200 m;
d refers to the distance from mobile station to antenna, unit: Km;
m
Ah refers to mobile station antenna height correction factor;
12 12 12 12
m
C refers to city center correction factor, 3 dBm for large cities and 0 dBm for
middle- and small-size cities.
In practical radio propagation environment, topographical features shall also be taken
into account. The planning software Aircom does make some improvements by
considering the topographical impacts in practical environment on the electric wave
propagation, and thus guarantee the accuracy of coverage prediction result in a better
manner.
The model is expressed as below:
Path loss = k1 + k2log(d) + k3Hms + k4lg(Hms) + k5lg(Heff) + k6log(Heff)log(d) +
k7(diffraction loss) + clutter loss
d refers to the distance from mobile station to BS antenna, unit: Km;
Heff refers to the effective height of BS transmit antenna, unit: m;
Hms refers to the height of mobile station antenna, unit: m;
diffraction loss refers to dispersion loss;
clutter loss refers to topographical feature loss correction factor.
To analyze the electric wave propagation of different regions and different cities, the K
value may vary with different topographical features and different city environments.
In practice, you need to determine the K value of different regions, cities and areas
through propagation model correction.
2.2 Link Budget
Link budget is the precondition of coverage planning. Calculation of the maximum
allowed loss of services can be made to get the coverage radius of cell in a certain
transmission model, so as to determine the BS scale under the continuous coverage
conditions. Generally, link budget shall be made in two directions of uplink (from MS
to BS) and downlink (from BS to MS). In addition, uplink/downlink balance shall be
implemented. The coverage planning is generally calculated based on the maximum
radius that the MS can reach (that is, uplink budget). That is because many uncertain
factors (such as number of subscribers that are simultaneously connected, subscriber
distribution, and subscriber rate) affect the forward coverage radius, which makes the
calculation complicated. In general cases, the BS power can satisfy the coverage
13 13 13 13
requirement. That is, the coverage is uplink limited. Table 2.2-1 shows the basic
algorithm of link budget.
Table 2.2-1
Parameter Symbol Procedure
Transmitter power (dBm) A
Transmitting antenna gain (dBi) B
Transmitting-end human body loss (dB) C
Transmitting-end feeder loss (dB) D
Transmitting-end effective radiation power (dBm) E E=A+B-C-D
Thermal noise density (dBm/Hz) F
Thermal noise (dBm) G G=F+10*LOG(3840000)
Receiver noise coefficient (dB) H
Receiver noise (dBm) I I=G+H
Interference margin (dB) J
Service bit rate (kbps) K
Processing gain (dB) L L=10*LOG(3840/K)
Eb/No (dB) M
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) N N=I+J-L+M
Receiver antenna gain (dBi) O
Receiver feeder loss (dB) P
Receiving-end human body loss (dB) Q
Power control margin (dB) R
Soft handoff gain (dB) S
Shadow fading margin (dB) T
Penetration loss (dB) U
Maximum allowed path loss (dB) V V=E-N+O-P-Q-R+S-T-U
2.2.1 Basic Link Budget Parameters
This section describes basic parameters of the WCDMA link budget.
1.Transmitter power:
BS transmitting power:
The maximum transmitting power of BS is 43 dB. The power of the Dedicated
CHannel (DCH) accounts for 63% of the total power. Table 2.2-2 shows the
power distribution of all channels:
14 14 14 14
Table 2.2-2 Power Distribution of Channels
Power (dBm) Power (W) Proportion
Max Tx Power: 43.0 20.0 100.00%
Pilot Power: 33.0 2.0 10%
PCCPCH(BCH): 30.0 1.0 5%
SCCPCH(FACH): 30.0 1.0 5%
SCCPCH(PCH): 30.0 1.0 5%
AICH: 26.0 0.4 2%
PICH: 26.0 0.4 2%
P-SCH: 29.0 0.8 4%
S-SCH: 29.0 0.8 4%
DCH 41.0 12.6 63%
The BS transmitting power is a system parameter, different for individual services. It
shall be determined in accordance with service type and service coverage.
MS transmitting power:
During link budget, suppose the maximum transmitting power of UE data
service to +21 dBm and that of voice service to +21 dBm.
Tips:
The BS transmitting power is a system parameter, different for individual services. It
shall be determined in accordance with service type and service coverage. In the
network optimization process, optimization engineers shall adjust power distribution to
all channels in accordance with network quality and service requirement to provide the
whole network with the optimal performance.
2. Human body loss
It is generally 3 dB for voice service and 0 dB for data service.
3. Antenna gain
It is generally 0 dB for the UE.
During link budget, suppose the directional antenna gain of the BS to 17 dBi and
the omni-directional receiving antenna gain to 11 dBi. In practice, different
antennas can be selected in accordance with different region types and coverage
requirements.
4. Feeder loss
15 15 15 15
It includes the loss of all feeders and connectors between the equipment top and
the antenna connector. For a feeder of 30-40 meters long, suppose the total
feeder loss to 4 dB (including the connector loss) during link budget. For a
feeder of 40-50 meters long, suppose the total feeder loss to 5 dB (including the
connector loss) during link budget.
The feeder loss may decrease the BS receiving level and shorten the coverage
radius. Tower amplifiers can be used to make up for the feeder loss on the
uplink.
5. Eb/No
In the GSM system, the Signal-to-Noise ratio (S/N) is used to describe the
anti-interference capability of useful signals. When S/N matches certain
conditions, the receiver can demodulate useful signals. In the WCDMA system,
however, useful signals are submerged in the noise. So S/N cannot be used to
reflect the signal quality sufficiently. Eb/No serves as the reference of signal
quality in the WCDMA system.
Eb/No indicates the demodulation threshold of the receiver, that is, energy per
bit divided by the noise power spectrum density.
Eb indicates the signal energy per bit, that is, Eb = S/R where S indicates signal
energy and R indicates service bit rate.
No indicates the noise power spectrum density, that is No = N/W where W
indicates bandwidth (3.84 M) and N indicates noise (total receiving power
except the signal itself).
Eb/No =
N
W
R
S
=
R
W
N
S
= PG
N
S

PG indicates the processing gain. As an important index of the spread spectrum
system, it reflects the amplitude of valid signals increased by the spread
spectrum technology at the demodulation end.
N S is similar to I C in the GSM system.
In the unit of dB, Eb/No = S(dBm) N(dBm) + 10lg(W/R).
The value of Eb/No is related to the receiving/transmitting diversity of mobile
16 16 16 16
equipment, multi-path channel condition, and service type.
Table 2.2-3 and Table 2.2-4 show the uplink/downlink Eb/No values of different
services under different multi-path channel conditions.
Table 2.2-3 Uplink Eb/No Value
UL Eb/No (dB) Urban Area Suburb Area
Service type Static TU 3km/h TU 50km/h RA 3km/h RA 50km/h RA 120km/h
AMR 12.2k 4.1 4.2 6.4 4.1 6 6.4
CS 64K 2.5 2.87 4.5 2.8 5.2 5.2
PS 64K 0.9 1.6 4.5 2.7 5 4.9
Table 2.2-4 Downlink Eb/No Value
UL Eb/No (dB) Urban Area Suburb Area
Service type Static TU 3km/h TU 50km/h RA 3km/h RA 50km/h RA 120km/h
AMR 12.2k 7.2 7.7 7.1 8.5 8.4 7.2
CS 64K 7.1 7.7 6.7 8.8 8.2 7.1
PS 64K 6.4 7.4 6.2 8 7.8 6.4
PS 128K 5.7 6.4 5.5 7.3 7.3 5.7
PS 384K 6.4 8 5.9 7.7 7.7 6.4
6. Interference margin
Interference margin = ) 1 lg( lg 10 , where indicates the cell load.
The WCDMA system is of self-interference, and its coverage is closed related to
the system capacity. At earlier network stages, little traffic results in low value of
interference margin. As the traffic load increases, the interference margin
becomes larger and the BS coverage shrinks. With regard to link budget,
therefore, it is necessary to select the maximum uplink load in accordance with
the estimated traffic increasing trend to ensure good coverage.
The value of interference margin in the uplink budget depends on the capacity
requirement in the network design. The interference margin is 3 dB when the
load is taken 50% from the dense urban area or a cell in the urban area, it is 2.2
dB when the load is taken 40% from the suburb area, and it is 1.5 dB when the
load is taken 30% from the rural area.
For the downlink, the relationship between load and interference still exists. The
17 17 17 17
interference margin shall be determined by emulation because it is hard to make
the theoretic calculation.
7. BS receiving sensitivity
BS receiving sensitivity indicates the minimum receiving level that the service
channel requires to guarantee the decoding requirement with certain
communication qualities.
From the above deduction of Eb/No:
S(dBm) = Eb/No(dB) + N(dBm) - 10lg(W/R).
N indicates the total noise that the BS receives, that is, N = Noise + N
f
+ IM.
In the formula:
Noise indicates the thermal noise, caused by electronic thermal movements in
the conductor. It is generated between antenna and receiver as well as in the
damaged component coupler of level 1 of the receiver. In most of
communication systems, the power spectrum density is the same at the fixed
frequency point because the noise bandwidth is far larger than the system
bandwidth. From the DC to the frequency of 10
12
Hz, therefore, the noise power
generated by the thermal noise source is the same per unit bandwidth. The
calculation formula of power is:
Noise = KTW (in the unit of W)
K indicates a Boltzmann constant, namely 1.38*10-23J/K.
T indicates the Kelvin temperature, namely 290 K.
W indicates the signal bandwidth, namely 3.84 M.
When dBm is taken as the calculation unit:
Noise = 10lg(KT) + 10lg(W).
10lg(KT) indicates the thermal noise density (in the unit of dBm/Hz).
N
f
indicates the BS noise coefficient, defined as the ratio of input S/N to output
S/N. 3GPP does not have specific requirement for the equipment noise. It is
generally taken as 3 dB for link budget.
IM indicates the noise increasing caused by system load.
18 18 18 18
S(dBm) = Eb/No(dB) + 10lg(KTW) + N
f
(dBm) + IM(dBm) - 10lg(W/R).
The formula of BS receiving sensitivity is:
Receiver Sensitivity = 10lg(KT) + Nf + 10lg(Eb/No) + 10lgR + IM.
10lg(KT) indicates the thermal noise density, namely 174 dBm/Hz.
Nf indicates the BS noise coefficient, namely 3 dB.
IM indicates the interference margin.
8. Soft handoff gain
Here, soft handoff gain indicates the gain to overcome slow fading. When the
mobile equipment is located in the soft handoff region, multiple radio links of
soft handoff receive signals at the same time, which decreases the requirement
for the shadow fading margin. The soft handoff gain is generally taken as 3 dB
for link budget.
9. Power control margin (fast fading margin)
The WCDMA system adopts the fast closed-loop power control of 1500 Hz. For
a low-speed mobile terminal, the fast closed-loop power control of 1500 Hz can
fight fast fading and guarantee the demodulation performance. Because of the
features of fast fading, however, the fast power control cannot compensate deep
fading when the low-speed mobile terminal is in deep fading. In this case, the
UE (Node B) needs to fight deep fading by increasing the average transmitting
power. When the UE is located at the edge of a cell, the fast power control
cannot compensate deep fading either. Therefore, it is necessary to reserve a
certain dynamic adjustment scope of transmitting power for the fast closed-loop
power control during link budget. The power control margin is generally taken
as 3dB.
For a medium-speed or high-speed terminal (moving speed 50 km/hour), the
interleave in the channel code functions to fight fast fading while the fast
closed-loop power control has little function. So it is unnecessary to reserve the
power control margin.
10. Penetration loss
The penetration loss of buildings and vehicles is an important factor that
influences the radio coverage. The penetration loss is related to the specific
19 19 19 19
building/vehicle type and incident angle of radio wave. Suppose that the
penetration loss complies with lognormal distribution during link budget, and
use the average value of penetration loss and standard deviation to describe it. If
the radio coverage outside buildings is effective, it is enough to set the
penetration loss to 10dB15dB. To receive and initiate calls at the core part of a
building, it is necessary to set the penetration loss to 30dB. Similarly, the
penetration loss is also important to the coverage inside vehicles. A car has the
penetration loss of 3dB to 6dB, and vans and buses may have larger changes.
The penetration loss at the front of vans should not exceed that of cars, but that
at the rear of vans may reach 10dB to 12dB. The specific value is dependent on
the number of windows. Therefore, it is necessary to set a reasonable penetration
loss value in accordance with actual conditions of the planning region during
link budget to guarantee good service quality.
11. Shadow fading margin
The shadow fading complies with lognormal distribution. Its value is related to
the sector edge communication probability and shadow fading standard
deviation, while the latter is related to the electromagnetic wave propagation
environment.
The fading margin is reserved to overcome fading changes and guarantee
reliability of communications in the cell. It shall correspond to certain
requirements of cell edge communication probability.
In the radio space propagation, the path loss of any a given distance changes
rapidly and the path loss value can be regarded as a random variable in
conformity with lognormal distribution. In the case of network design in
accordance with the average path loss, the loss value of points at the cell edge
shall be larger than the path loss median for 50% of time period, and smaller
than the median for the left 50% of time period. That is, the edge coverage
probability of the cell is 50% only. In this case, it is hard for subscribers at the
cell edge to obtain expected service quality with 50% of probability. To improve
coverage probability of the cell, it is necessary to reserve the fading margin
during link budget. The edge coverage probability is generally taken to 75% for
link budget. The following takes the edge coverage probability equal to or larger
than 75% as an example:
20 20 20 20
Suppose the random variable of propagation loss to
which is Gaussian
distribution on dB. Set the average value to
m
, the standard deviation to
,
and the corresponding probability distribution function to
Q
. Set a loss
threshold
1
. If the propagation loss is larger than this threshold, the signal
strength will fail to meet the demodulation requirement of expected service
qualities. The edge coverage probability equal to or larger than 75% can be
represented as:
= < =
1
2
) (
cov
2
2
2
1
) 1 (

d e P P
m
r erage

For the outdoor environment, the standard deviation of the random variable of
propagation loss is always taken to 8 dB. The margin value corresponding to the
edge coverage probability (communication probability) of 75% is:
dB m 4 . 5 8 675 . 0 675 . 0 1 = = =
See Fig. 2.2-1 and Fig. 2.2-2:
0%
10%
20%
30%
40%
50%
60%
70%
80%
90%
100%
- 3 - 2. 5 - 2 - 1. 5 - 1 - 0. 5 0 0. 5 1 1. 5 2 2. 5 3
75% 75% 75% 75%
0
.
6
7
5
0
.
6
7
5
0
.
6
7
5
0
.
6
7
5

Accumulated normal probability distribution
M
e
d
i
a
n
Deviation with median signal m

Fig. 2.2-1 Fading MarginProbability Distribution Function
21 21 21 21
m
Normal distribution
probability density function
Standard deviation=8dB
0.675 x8=5.4dB
Threshold
Propagati
on loss

Fig. 2.2-2 Fading MarginProbability Density Function
The above figures show that it is necessary to reserve 5.4 dB margin to guarantee the
edge coverage probability of 75% in the network planning. An easier method is to
calculate by using the NORMINV function in Excel. Table 2.2-5 and Fig. 2.2-3 show
the values of shadow fading margin and edge coverage probability in different standard
deviations.
Table 2.2-5 Shadow Fading Margin and Edge Coverage Probability in Different Standard
Deviations
Shadow Fading Margin
Edge Coverage Probability
= 6dB
= 8dB
= 10dB
= 12dB
50% 0 0 0 0
55% 0.75 1.01 1.26 1.51
60% 1.52 2.03 2.53 3.04
65% 2.31 3.08 3.85 4.62
70% 3.15 4.20 5.24 6.29
75% 4.05 5.40 6.74 8.09
80% 5.05 6.73 8.42 10.10
85% 6.22 8.29 10.36 12.44
90% 7.69 10.25 12.82 15.38
95% 9.87 13.16 16.45 19.74
98% 12.32 16.43 20.54 24.64
22 22 22 22
0
0. 75
1. 52
2. 31
3. 15
4. 05
5. 05
6. 22
7. 69
9. 87
0
1. 01
2. 03
3. 08
4. 20
5. 40
6. 73
8. 29
10. 25
13. 16
0
1. 26
2. 53
3. 85
5. 24
6. 74
8. 42
10. 36
12. 82
16. 45
0
1. 51
3. 04
4. 62
6. 29
8. 09
10. 10
12. 44
15. 38
19. 74
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
50% 55% 60% 65% 70% 75% 80% 85% 90% 95%
6dB
8dB
10dB
12dB
S
h
a
d
o
w

f
a
d
i
n
g

m
a
r
g
i
n

(
d
B
)
Edge coverage probability

Fig. 2.2-3 Shadow Fading Margin and Edge Coverage Probability in Different Standard Deviations
2.2.2 Unlink Budget
The parameters taken in the last section can be used to calculate the uplink budget
under different environments and coverage requirements. The following table shows
the calculation process:
Table 2.2-6 Uplink Budget
Parameter Symbol
Maximum transmitting power of UE A
UE antenna transmitting gain B
UE transmitting loss (human body loss) C
Actual maximum transmitting power of UE per channel D= A +B C
Environment thermal noise power spectrum density E
Uplink noise figure F
Uplink receiving noise power spectrum density G = E +F
Uplink noise rise H
Total BS uplink receiving interference power spectrum density I = G + H
Uplink signal quality requirement Eb/No J
Uplink service rate K
23 23 23 23
Parameter Symbol
Uplink receiving sensitivity
L = I + 10lg(3.84*10
6
) +(J
10lg (3.84*10
6
/ k ))
BS antenna gain M
BS integrated loss N
Shadow fading margin P
Soft handoff gain Q
Power control margin R
Penetration loss S
Maximum loss T = D -L +M-N-P+Q-R-S
2.2.3 Uplink/Downlink Balance
Different from uplink budget, downlink budget makes all subscribers in the cell share
the BS power at the same time. The BS power distribution aims to make all subscriber
services connected with the BS in the cell match the corresponding service level.
Besides the number of subscribers in the cell, the downlink cell radius is also related to
the location and services of the subscriber.
The following table shows the parameters that cause the maximum allowed path loss
difference between uplink budget and downlink budget. The downlink is usually
limited by the capacity. When the load of the cell increases, the condition of limited
downlink may occur.
Table 2.2-7 Uplink/Downlink Parameter Comparison
Parameter Uplink Downlink
Receiver noise coefficient (dB) 2.2 7
Maximum transmitting power (dBm) 21
Depending on the maximum single-channel
transmitting power
Receiving-end E
b
/N
o
(dB) (12.2 kbps) 4. 2 7.2
The balance between the uplink and downlink needs the help of planning software for
iterative calculation. The calculation includes the uplink coverage estimation and the
downlink power distribution. It shows link balance if the total power does not exceed
the maximum BS transmitting power. If the total power required by the downlink
exceeds the maximum BS transmitting power, it is necessary to reduce the coverage
area and conduct the downlink power distribution again until the total power is smaller
24 24 24 24
than or equal to the maximum BS transmitting power.
2.3 Coverage Scale Estimation
2.3.1 Calculation of BS Coverage Radius
After acquisition of the maximum allowed path loss between MS and BS via link
budget, it is easy to estimate the BS coverage radius by combining with the local radio
propagation model. In fact, the radio propagation model describes the relationship
between path propagation loss and coverage distance. The maximum allowed path loss
and radio propagation model that have been known can be used to conversely deduct
the maximum BS coverage radius. If the coverage radius of macro-cell BS is to be
estimated only without considering the topographic features, the macro-cell radius can
be calculated by using the Cost231-hata model.
10 = R
( ) ( )
b m m b
h Ah C h f Pathloss lg 55 . 6 9 . 44 / lg 82 . 13 lg 9 . 33 3 . 46 + + =
Pathloss indicates the maximum allowed path loss, acquired via link budget.
f indicates the carrier frequency, in the unit of MHz.
b
h indicates the BS antenna height, in the unit of m.
d indicates the distance from the MS to the antenna, in the unit of Km.
m
Ah indicates the mobile antenna height correction factor.
m
C indicates the big-city center correction factor, 3 dBm for big cities and 0 dBm for
medium and small cities.
Tips:
In practice, the universal model of emulation software (such as Aircom) is generally
used:
Path loss = k1 + k2log(d) + k3Hms + k4log(Hms) + k5log(Heff) + k6log(Heff)log(d) +
k7(diffraction loss) + clutter loss
Obtain the radio propagation model that best matches the actual environment of the
local area by correcting k1, k2, k3, k4, k5, k6, k7(diffraction loss) and clutter loss.
25 25 25 25
2.3.2 Calculation of BS Coverage Area
The cell coverage radius R calculated in the last section can be used to obtain the BS
coverage area Area and inter-BS distance D. The BS coverage area is related to the
BS type. The following shows some common BS types of Node B:
1. Omni-directional BS
R
D

Area =
2
3
2
3
R , D = R 3
2. Three-sector directional BS (65 horizontal lobe)
D
R

Area =
2
3
8
9
R , D = R
2
3

3. Six-sector directional BS
26 26 26 26
D
R

Area =
2
3
2
3
R , D = R 3
2.3.3 Scale Calculation
The planning region area divided by the single-BS coverage area is the number of BSs
that can cover the region with coverage requirements satisfied.

27 27 27 27
3 WCDMA Capacity Estimation
3.1 Capacity Estimation Flow
The capacity estimation is another important part of the scale estimation. The purpose
of capacity estimation is to estimate the approximate BS number needed by the
capacity according to the service model and service traffic demand of the network
planning. Similar with the link budget, the capacity estimation should be performed
from the uplink and downlink. For the WCDMA system capacity, the interference is
limited in the uplink direction and the BS power is limited in the downlink direction. In
the 2G CDMA network, the voice service is the main application service with
symmetrical uplink and downlink traffic, the capacity is limited in the uplink direction,
so the uplink capacity calculation is focused on in capacity estimation. However, in the
WCDMA network, the data service proportion is obviously increased and the network
uplink and downlink traffic becomes asymmetric generally, and even the downlink
capacity may be limited. Therefore, the WCDMA capacity estimation should be
performed from the uplink and downlink respectively. The following steps are involved
in capacity estimation:
1. Hybrid service intensity analysis. The WCDMA system can provide multiple
services. The hybrid service intensity analysis makes the system capacity
consumed by various services equivalent to that consumed by a single service.
2. Uplink capacity estimation. Estimate the BS number that meets the service
demand based on the hybrid service intensity analysis.
3. Downlink capacity estimation. It is a verification process. The BS transmission
power formula is used to calculate the channel number that can be provided by
the current BS scale so as to verify whether this channel number can meet the
capacity requirement, and if it cannot, stations need be added.
3.2 Estimation Method of Hybrid Service Capacity
There are multiple services in the WCDMA network, their service rates and required
Eb/No are diversified, the effects on the system load and consumed BS resources are
different, so the estimation for the cell capacity cannot adopt the method for estimating
28 28 28 28
the cell capacity in a pure voice network. An idea of hybrid service capacity estimation
is to make equivalent among various services to make the system capacity consumed
by various services equivalent to that consumed by a single service. The Equivalent
Erlang, Post Erlang-B and Campbell methods in the hybrid service estimation are
introduced respectively as follows.
3.2.1 Equivalent Erlang Method
The fundamental principle of the Equivalent Erlang method is to make a service
equivalent to another service, calculate the total traffic (erl) of the equivalent services
and count the channel number needed by this traffic. We will give an example to
explain it as below.
Suppose services A and B are provided in the network, where,
service A: each connection occupies one channel and the total is 12 erl;
service B: each connection occupies 3 channels and the total is 6 erl.
If 1 erl service B is equivalent to 3 erl service A, the total traffic in the network will be
12+6*3=30 erl (service A). After querying Table erl-B, we know that altogether 39
channels are needed under 2% blocking rate.
If 3 erl service A is equivalent to 1 erl service B, the total traffic in the network will be
12/3+6=10 erl (service B). After querying Table erl-B, we know that altogether 17
service B channels (equivalent to 17*3=51 service A channels) are needed under 2%
blocking rate.
Upon the above analysis, we know that calculation result through the Equivalent
Erlang method is related to the equivalent mode adopted. The result through the former
equivalent mode is too small (39 channels) which is too optimistic, while the result
through the latter mode is too large (51 channels), which is too pessimistic, as shown in
the following figure:
29 29 29 29
Capacities meeting the
same GOS are different
Low speed
service
equivalent
2 Erl Low
speed service
1 Erl High
speed service
High speed service
equivalent
The calculation
result is related
to the
equivalent
mode

3.2.2 Post Erlang-B Method
The fundamental principle of the Post Erlang-B method is to calculate the channel
number required by each service capacity respectively and add channels in an
equivalent manner to obtain the channel number required by the hybrid service capacity.
We will give an example to explain it as below.
After querying Table erl-B, we know that altogether 19 channels are needed to meet
service A traffic (12 erl) under 2% blocking rate.
After querying Table erl-B, we know that altogether 12 service B channels (equivalent
to 12*3=36 service A channels) are needed to meet service B traffic (6 erl) under 2%
blocking rate.
The two services need 19+36=55 channels totally.
Calculate the network capacity in a special case based on the Post Erlang-B method:
Suppose services A and B are the same kind, where,
After querying Table erl-B, we know that altogether 19 channels are needed to meet
30 30 30 30
service A traffic (12 erl) under 2% blocking rate.
After querying Table erl-B, we know that altogether 12 channels are needed to meet the
service B traffic (6 erl) under 2% blocking rate.
Services A and B need 19+12=31 channels totally.
Because services A and B are the same kind, the total traffic is 12+6=18 erl. According
to the currently known method of capacity calculation in single service, after querying
Table erl-B, we know that 26 channels are needed to meet the traffic demand under 2%
blocking rate. This result is correct obviously.
Upon above analysis, we can see that the calculation result through the Post Erlang
method is too pessimistic (31>26). The reason is that the BS channels are shared
among services, however, the Post Erlang method factitiously separates the channels
used by the services, and thus, the BS channel resource utilization ratio is reduced, as
shown in the following figure:
Capacities meeting the same
GOS are different
1 ERL service A
1 ERL service B
1 ERL service A and
1 ERL service B
The
calculation
result is too
pessimistic

3.2.3 Campbell Method
The fundamental principle of the Campbell method is to make all services equivalent to
a virtual service based on certain rules, calculate the total traffic (erl) of this virtual
service, count the virtual channel number needed by this traffic, and convert the
number into the actual channel number that meets the network capacity.
The equivalent principle of the Campbell model:
31 31 31 31
= =
i
i i
i
i i
a erl
a erl
v
c
2

c
ffic OfferedTra

=

c
a C
Capacity
i i
) (
=

Where, c indicates capacity factor.
v indicates hybrid service variance.
indicates hybrid service mean.

i
a
indicates the equivalent intensity of service i.
i
C
indicates the channel number needed by service i.
OfferedTraffic indicates traffic of the virtual service.
Capacity indicates the virtual channel number needed by the virtual traffic.
We will give an example to explain it as below.
Equivalent intensity of service A a1=1 and that of service B a2=3.
The hybrid service mean is
= + = =
i
i i
a erl 30 3 6 1 12

The hybrid service variance is
= + = =
i
i i
a erl v 66 3 6 1 12
2 2

The capacity factor is
2 . 2
30
66
= = =
v
c

The virtual traffic is
63 . 13
2 . 2
30
= = =
c
ffic OfferedTra

After querying Table erl-B, we know that altogether 21 virtual channels are needed to
32 32 32 32
meet the virtual traffic under 2% blocking rate.
According to formula (), under 2% blocking rate, the channel number needed by each
service is shown as follows:
Service A:
47 1 ) 2 . 2 21 (
1
= + = C

Service B:
49 3 ) 2 . 2 21 (
1
= + = C

From the above analysis, compared with results of the Equivalent Erlang and Post
Erlang-B methods, the result of the Campbell method is more credible, so it is a more
reasonable estimation method for hybrid service capacity at present. According to the
Campbell method, under the same requirement of the service level GOS, diversified
channel resources are needed by different services, or, under the same channel
resources, different services obtain diversified service levels. From this point of view,
the Campbell method is more reasonable. However, the Campbell method makes all
services uniformly equivalent as the circuit domain services and uses the Erlang-B
model for analysis and calculation. In fact, the features of the packet domain services
are completely different from those of the circuit domain services, and in addition, the
Erlang-B establishment conditions are not satisfied, so this equivalent method has
defects itself. A further research is needed for better hybrid service establishment
model and capacity analysis method.
In the Campbell method, the service equivalent intensity a can be calculated based on
channel number consumed by each kind of service or based on the interference
introduced from the air interface by each kind of service, shown as follows:
1 amplitude for 1 amplitude for rate bit
service for service for rate bit
amplitude Relative
0
0
N
E
N
E
b
b
=

If the reference service is the voice service, with its activity at the physical layer
considered, the above formula can be modified to:
for voice v for voice for voice rate bit
service for service for rate bit
amplitude Relative
0
0

=
N
E
N
E
b
b

33 33 33 33
3.3 Uplink Capacity Estimation
3.3.1 Load Analysis for Uplink
In the WCDMA system, all users adopt the same carrier and each signal becomes a
noise (interference) for others upon coding. Therefore, each signal is contained in the
bandwidth interference background generated by other user. To access a call, the
mobile station power must be large enough to overcome other mobile stations in the
bandwidth, that is, the receive signal in the BS must reach Eb/No (energy per user bit
to noise spectral density) required by the service demodulation.
No Eb
j
= ) / (
User J's handling gain
User J's signal
Total receive power (without its own signal)

The above formula can be written into:
j total
j
j j
j
P I
P
R v
W
No Eb
= ) / (

Where, W indicates the chip rate, 3.84 Mchip/s.
vj indicates user js activation factor.
Rj is user js bit rate.
Pj indicates receive power for signals from user j.
Itotal indicates total broadband receive power with the thermal noise power included of
the BS.
From the above formula, we know that the receive power at the BS receive end should
meet the following formula so that the user signal can meet the demodulation
requirement:
total
j j j
j
I
v R No Eb
W
P
) / (
1
1
+
=

34 34 34 34
Define a connection load factor Lj:
j j j
j
v R No Eb
W
L
) / (
1
1
+
=

Lj indicates the ratio of user signal power to the total BS receive power, so a single
user signal power Pj is represented to
tatal j j
I L P =
.
The total receive power of all N users from one cell is:

= =
=
N
j
tatal j
N
j
j
I L P
1 1

Generally, the total receive power at the BS receive end consists of in-cell user
interference power, out-cell user interference power and BS thermal noise, that is:
N other in tatal
P P P I + + =

Where, Pin indicates the total interference power of in-cell users.
Pother indicates the total interference power of out-cell users.
PN indicates the BS thermal noise power.
Because the out-cell mobile station interference power is not controlled by the local
cell BS, the interference is hard to determine. Generally, define the ratio of the
interference from other cell to that of the local cell as the neighbor cells interference
factor i:
= i
Other cell interference
Local cell interference

i indicates the ratio of other cell interference to the local cell interference at the BS
receive end of the local cell. Generally, the neighbor cell interference factor of the
macro cell that adopts omni antenna is 0.55 and that of the macro cell that adopts
three-sector antenna is 0.65.

35 35 35 35
Therefore, the total user receive power of the BS is:
=
+ = +
N
j
tatal j other in
I L i P P
1
) 1 (

Define the noise lifting as the ratio of total broadband receive power to the noise power
of the BS, that is:
=
+
=

= =
N
j
j
other in tatal
tatal
N
total
L i
P P I
I
P
I
NR
1
) 1 ( 1
1

Define the uplink load factor
UL
as

= =
+
+ = + =
N
j
j j j
N
j
j UL
v R No Eb
W
i L i
1 1
) / (
1
1
) 1 ( ) 1 (

UL
indicates the ratio of the user signal power at the BS receive end to the total
receive power of the broadband.
Then, the noise lifting can be represented to:
UL
NR

=
1
1
or
) 1 ( 10 ) (
10 UL
LOG dB NR =

This equation reflects the thermal noise lifting caused by user interference at the BS
receive end. 3 dB noise lifting corresponds to 50% load factors and 6 dB noise lifting
corresponds to 75% load factors. Generally, the network planning supposes that the
uplink load factor is 50%, in a single service, the channel number provided by each cell
can be calculated through formula (1), and then, the total BS number required by the
uplink capacity demand can be counted further. For the capacity estimation for hybrid
service, the Campbell algorithm should be combined to make the system resources
consumed by various services equivalent to those consumed by a single service. Then,
the channel number provided by each cell can be calculated through formula (1), and
the BS number required by the hybrid service capacity demand can be counted further.
The next section details the capacity estimation flow of the hybrid service.
36 36 36 36
Tips:
The uplink noise lifting NR corresponds to the interference margin in the uplink
budget, that is, the coverage is related to the capacity. In planning, the network load
factor should be determined to get the noise lifting corresponding to this load. Then,
the BS radius meeting the uplink capacity requirement can be calculated further
through the link budget.
3.3.2 Uplink Capacity and Scale Estimation
The previous section describes the load factor of uplink, based on which, this section
describes how to estimate the BS quantity satisfying the composite traffic requirements
for uplink. Fig. 3.3-1 shows the flow of estimating uplink capacity.
Calculate equivalent
intensity of services
Calculate the variance,
average value and capacity
factor of the mixed service
Virtual traffic A of the
system
Calculate the quantity
of equivalent voice channels
in a cell
The quantity of virtual
channels in the sell
Virtual traffic B of the cell
Number
of cells
A/B

Fig. 3.3-1 Flow Chart of Estimating Uplink Capacity
1. Calculate the virtual composite traffic of the system.
Because various services have different effects on system load, such an effect
37 37 37 37
can be equivalent to the effect of multiple voice channels on system load. The
calculation formula is as follows:
amplitude service= (Rservice x Eb/Noservice x vservice)/ (Rvoice x Eb/Novoice
x voice)
Where, R represents service rate.
Eb/No represents quality factor of the service.
v represents the activation factor of the service at the physical layer
According to the Campell theory, the virtual composite traffic of the system can
be calculated.
2. Calculate the quantity N of equivalent voice channels provided by a cell.
Suppose that system capacity load is represented by , the uplink capacity
formula is as follows
+
+ =
N
j
o
b
j
N
E
v R
W
f
1
*
1
* 1
1
* ) 1 (

Where, represents load factor, f represents interference factor from an adjacent
cell, v represents activation factor and N represents the quantity of channels.
According to the above formula, the quantity N of equivalent voice channels
provided by a cell can be evaluated.
3. Calculate the quantity of virtual channels in every cell
Bases on the quantity N of equivalent voice channels evaluated in step 2 and the
following formula
voice channel=virtual channel*C
Where, voice channel is the quantity N of equivalent voice channels
The quantity of virtual channels in every cell can be evaluated.
4. Look up Table Erl B according to the quantity of virtual channels evaluated in
step 3, and get the quantity of virtual traffic in every cell.
5. Calculate the quantity of cells
38 38 38 38
According to the virtual composite traffic of the system evaluated in step 2 and
virtual traffic of every cell evaluated in step 4, calculate the quantity of required
cells:
the number of cells=composite traffic/the virtual Erlang number every cell
The quantity of BSs required in three sectors is calculated as follows: the
number of cells/3.
3.4 Downlink Capacity Estimation
3.4.1 Analysis of Downlink Load
On the downlink, BS power is shared by all users in a cell. When no power in total BS
power can be allocated to a new user, air interface capacity reaches its limit. That is to
say, when a BS transmits the total power used for normal running of all users exceeds
the rated power of the BS, downlink capacity reaches power limit. Therefore, downlink
capacity is limited by the total transmitting power of the BS.
Similar to the analysis method of uplink capacity, analysis of downlink capacity starts
from the Eb/No value required by signal demodulation. To correctly demodulate useful
signals on the downlink, the mobile station must overcome interference from the
following three aspects: interference caused by nonorthogonality of the channel in a
cell, interference of signals from the outside of the cell and thermal noise from the
mobile station. That is,
N other tatal
P P P I + + = ) 1 (

Where, P represents total BS transmitting power.
Pother represents total interference power of signals from the outside of the cell.
PN represents thermal noise power from the mobile station.
represents quadrature factor of the downlink.
On the downlink, quadrature factor is a very important parameter. Users on the
downlink of WCDMA are differentiated based on the orthogonal code. In the case there
is no multipath propagation, orthogonality keeps unchanged when the mobile station
receives signals from the BS. However, in the actual process of signal propagation,
multipath delay is unavoidable, therefore orthogonality between channels is damaged,
39 39 39 39
thus causing interference. Quadrature factor 1 corresponds to the user fully orthogonal.
Generally, quadrature factor in the multipath channel is between 0.4 and 0.9.
By referring to the derivation means of uplink load factor, denote the downlink load
factor
DL
as follows:
=
+ =
N
j
j j
j
j
j DL
i
R W
No Eb
v
1
] ) 1 [(
/
) / (

Where,
W
represents chip rate at 3.84 Mchip/s.
vj
represents activation factor of the user j.
j
R
represents bit rate of the user j.
j
represents channel quadrature factor from the user j.

j
i represents the ratio of BS power received by the user j from other cell to that from
this cell.
Because mobile stations are distributed randomly in a cell,
j
and
j
i are related to
the location of users. For the average value of cell load factors, adopt its similar
average value in the whole cell, that is:
=
+ =
N
j
j
j
j DL
i
R W
No Eb
v
1
] ) 1 [(
/
) / (

Where,
represents the average quadrature factor in a cell. Generally, it is 60% for

the multipath channel and 90% for the non-multipath channel.
i
represents the
average ratio of the BS power received by the user from other cell to that from this cell.
Generally, it is 55% for the omni antenna macro cell and 65% for the three-sector
antenna macro cell.
During the analysis of downlink capacity, estimation of BS transmitting power is the
most important. The estimated BS transmitting power is average power not peak power
at the cell boundary, because the transmitting power distributed by the BS for each user
is determined by the average loss from the BS to the mobile station and the sensitivity
of the mobile station. On the actual network, users are distributed randomly in a cell,
not at the cell boundary, therefore, the average path loss value, not the maximum path
40 40 40 40
loss value estimated for the link, should be adopted when BS transmitting power is
calculated. In a macro cell, the difference between the maximum path loss and the
average path loss is usually 6 dB.
The total BS transmitting power can be expressed by the following formula:
DL
N
j
j
j
j rf
R W
No Eb
v L W N
TxP BS

=
=
1
/
) / (
_
1

Where,
rf
N
represents the noise power spectrum density on the front of the mobile
station receiver, and it can be calculated by the following formula:
) 290 (sup 0 . 174 K poseT NF dBm NF KT N
rf
= + = + = Where, NF
represents the noise coefficient of the mobile station receiver with the typical value of 5
dB to 9 dB.
L
represents the average path loss, which is evaluated by subtracting 6 dBm from the
maximum path loss.
vj represents activation factor of the user j.
Rj represents bit rate of the user j.
In the case of a single service, evaluate the channel quantity provided by every cell
under the maximum allowed transmitting power according to the formula (2) and
further evaluate the total number of BSs satisfying downlink capacity requirements.
In fact, the analysis of uplink and downlink link performances is a hard process.
Because the performance of downlink depends on many basic elements very much, its
analysis cannot be streamlined like the analysis of uplink. The Eb/No value range of
downlink is a parameter changing greatly with moving speed and multipath condition.
In addition, the mobile station receiver does not use antenna diversity. The reason why
the required Eb/No value changes with the mobile station is that at least two paths
cannot be ensured unless it is clearly known that the mobile station is in soft handoff or
softer handoff statuses. Such a change, randomicity of mobile station location and
interference level from the surrounding cell make the analysis of downlink
performance complicated. In designing, a very conservative conclusion can be gotten
in the case the worst condition is considered. Generally, estimate capacity after
analyzing the channel quantity required by uplink capacity, and observe whether the
41 41 41 41
downlink can support the mobile station to work in the designated coverage area and
its channel quantity reaches the channel quantity generated by the uplink.
3.4.2 Downlink Capacity and Scale Estimation
Downlink estimation is a verification process. The process of downlink capacity and
scale estimation is as follows: First calculate the quantity of equivalent voice channels
to be provided by this cell in the current service model, and then calculate the quantity
of equivalent voice channels availably provided by the cell according to the downlink
power calculation formula, and subsequently compare these two results. If the quantity
to be provided by the cell is less than that availably provided by the cell, it indicates
that downlink power is enough and the current scale satisfies system capacity
requirements. If the former is larger than the latter, it indicates that downlink capacity
is limited. To make downlink power enough, add some BSs.
1 Calculate the quantity of equivalent voice channels to be provided by every cell.
Under the precondition of known reverse capacity and scale, you can evaluate
the traffic of various services in every cell under such a scale. Then, according to
the equivalence of voice channels, you can evaluate the quantity of equivalent
voice channels to be provided by every cell. This quantity can be calculated by
following several steps below
1) Calculate the average traffic of various services in every cell according to the BS
quantity of uplink and total traffic of downlink.
Average traffic of various services in a cell =
3 ntity StationQua UplinkBase
inkTraffic TotalDownl

Where, the BS quantity is the larger value between estimated uplink coverage
and estimated capacity result.
2) According to the Campell theory, calculate the virtual Erlang traffic in every cell.
The calculation method in this step is the same as that of uplink.
3) Look up Table Erl B according to the virtual Erlang traffic in every cell
evaluated in step 2, and calculate the quantity of virtual channels in every cell.
4) According to the quantity of virtual channels evaluated in step 3 and the
following formula
42 42 42 42
c
a C
Capacity
i i
) (
=

you can evaluate the quantity of equivalent voice channels to be provided by
every cell.
2. Calculate the quantity of equivalent voice channels availably provided by the
cell.
According to the forward power formula
] ) 1 [(
/
) / (
* 1
/
) / (
* * *
1
1
j j
N
j
j
j
j
N
j
j
j
j N
R W
No Eb
v
R W
No Eb
v L P
P
+
=

=
=

Where, P
N
represents the noise power spectrum density on the front of the
mobile station receiver, and it can be calculated by the following formula:
) 290 (sup 0 . 174 K poseT NF dBm NF KT P
N
= + = + = ,
NF represents the noise coefficient of the mobile station receiver with the typical
value of 5 dB to 9 dB.
L represents the average path loss, which is evaluated by subtracting 6 dBm
from the maximum path loss. j represents the average quadrature factor.
Generally, it is 0.6 for the multipath channel and 0.9 for the non-multipath
channel.
j represents interference factor from an adjacent cell. Generally, it is 0.55 for
the omni antenna macro cell and 0.65 for the three-sector antenna macro cell.
The quantity of equivalent voice channels availably provided by the cell can be
calculated.
3. Compare the above two results. If the quantity to be provided by the cell is less
than that availably provided by the cell, it indicates that downlink power is
enough and the current scale satisfies system capacity requirements. If the
former is larger than the latter, it indicates that downlink capacity is limited. To
make downlink power enough, add some BSs.

43
4 Survey of Network Planning
4.1 Overview
The site survey of the WCDMA radio network planning is an important part of the
network planning work, which must be done carefully. The surveyor of network
planning site should carefully make the planning survey for sites and ensure the
authenticity and correctness of survey data. Make a good preparation for the incoming
network construction and provide an effective planning report for the later network
optimization.
The site survey and selection are conducted by the engineers of the operator and the
network planning engineers together. The network planning engineers put forward the
suggestion of site selection. The network planning engineers should be familiar with
the radio propagation environment and traffic density distribution around each site
through investigation and site selection, to obtain the latitude and longitude
information of the site.
4.2 Selection of Base Site
4.2.1 Method of Selecting Site
Site selection is crucial in the entire network planning process. If the site is selected
properly, it is only necessary to make a fine tune for the parameters in the planning.
Contrarily, if the site is selected improperly, it will lead to poor planning performance,
and even reselecting the site. In this case, the planning work in the former stage is
useless.
First, try to select the ideal location specified by the cell in the wireless communication
theory. The offset should be restricted about one quarter of base coverage radius R for
the cell splitting and network development in future. This is a basic principle of
network planning. The purpose is to identify the overall frame of he network.
The sites can be selected in the following ways:
44 44 44 44
4.2.1.1 Selection by Coverage and Capacity Requirements
Meeting the coverage and capacity is the most direct object of setting a site. Try to
meet the two conditions when selecting a site. In important areas, the capacity
requirement is high. Many base stations are required and the service demands are
urgent. So, these areas should be considered first during the site selection. In the areas
with a low requirement for capacity, site selection emphasizes particularly on the
coverage.
According to the above factors, select sites according to the following rule:
1. It is necessary to select sites for important coverage areas.
2. It is necessary to select sites for the main trunk road in the central urban area.
3. After selecting the critical sites, implement the large-area continuous coverage
for minor coverage area.
In the WCDMA radio network planning, the planning of the important coverage area is
pretty important. Setting the base stations in the important coverage area ensures
providing a good power coverage for mobile stations in these areas and meanwhile
absorb the traffic around effectively, thus improving the utility of the system. If the site
is selected properly, it can reduce the transmission power level of UE and thus reduces
the interference and increases the network capacity.
Point coverage: It indicates the coverage over important areas, including important
functional areas like office area of (provincial) municipal government, office area
(building) of operators, office building, star-level hotel, luxurious house area,
large-scaled shop, entertainment places and transport junction. There must be sites on
the building of the important coverage area or surrounding the important coverage area
within 50 m by taking the important coverage area as center. The distance between
base stations in the important coverage area is between 500 m and 800 m.
Line coverage: It indicates the coverage over the main business street, main transport
street in the city, inter-city freeway and airport road. Ensure that the traffic can shift on
the lines. Only after the line coverage is ensured, can the basic satisfaction of important
point users be ensured.
Plane coverage: After the above primary sites are selected, make the coverage on the
area plane with service demands. The purpose is to connect the independent important
areas and ensure the continuous coverage and seamless coverage of network.
45 45 45 45
4.2.1.2 Selection by Base Station Surroundings
After identifying the area for setting up base station, according to the effect factor of
surroundings (like height above sea level and types of surface features) on the radio
transmission, select a proper point which make the radio wave achieve a good coverage
in the area.
According to the above factor, the requirements for the sites are:
1. The sites should be located in the place high enough.
2. However, the place where he sites are cannot be too high.
3. The height different between two adjacent sites cannot be too large
The geographical environment such as plain, hill, a mountainous area, lake and island
cannot be changed. Therefore, screen the sites (buildings or surface features) in the
planning area to get the sites suitable for the geographical and surface features
environments in the planning area.
The location of the site should be high enough. The height of antenna of base stations
directly affects the coverage range of the cell. The antenna height should be higher than
the average height of buildings in the coverage area. Only in this case, the signal
density in the coverage area can be ensured. You can understand the importance of the
antenna height according to the radio wave propagation mechanism. According to the
current building density and average height, 35 m-height is a proper antenna height in
the urban area. In the rural area, 50 m height is proper.
The site cannot be located too high and the height difference between the adjacent sites
cannot be too large, determined by the features of the WCDMA system. The WCDMA
is the interference-restricted system. Overheight site usually crosses several coverage
areas. Thus, it will interfere with other cells and in result limits the capacity of the
entire system and reduce the general performance of the system.
4.2.1.3 Selection by Wireless Surroundings of Base Station
Avoid setting sites near the strong interferers like large-power radio station, radar
station and satellite ground station. The interference exists between the WCDMA
system and large-power transmitter. The transmission power of large-power transmitter
like microwave and medium wave is too large. As the out-of-band interference of the
base station, it can lead to the saturation effect of radio components, which may reduce
the sensitivity and coverage radius of the WCDMA base station.
46 46 46 46
At present, operator will take the wireless resources of existing network into account
fully when building a new network. Therefore, co-site with other wireless system is a
common choice. The currently-running radio network systems include GSM1800MHz,
GSM900MHz, CDMA1900MHz, CDMA800MHz and PHS network. In the co-site
situation, different systems will interfere with each other. The interference falls into by
generation mechanism: additive noise interference, crossmodulation interference,
blocking interference and intermodulation interference. The interference between
different systems can be resolved through the space isolation and adding filter. Usually,
the vertical/horizontal isolation between antennas is adopted to resolve the co-site
intersystem interference problem according to the roof of the base station.
Avoid setting site near the departments involved with the national security.
4.2.1.4 Selection by Existing Resources of Base Station
The network planning is a comprehensive system project. It is necessary to master
various kinds of information and define a reasonable planning scheme according to the
technical indices of WCDMA products before implementing the project.
When making a new WCDMA network planning, we should take the existing mobile
network as the reference model of the WCDMA radio network planning for full
reference to improve the correctness of wireless planning greatly. For a inheritance
WCDMA radio network planning, it is necessary to make a complete test and analysis
for the existing network. On this basis, provide the WCDMA radio network planning
scheme.
For a new WCDMA network planning, take the existing mobile network information
into account fully and make the best use of the resources like transmission and power
supply.
Select a the area with convenient transportation for the site of base station for the
convenience of engineering and maintenance in future.
Finally, according to the above information, find the key points, define the survey plan
and scale reasonably and identify the number of valid sites. The core is the relationship
between investment and return. The object of radio network solution is to shorten the
investment return period and lower the operation cost and investment risks. The
coverage objects are summarized as point coverage, line coverage and plane coverage.
Through the point coverage, line coverage and plane coverage, absorb the traffic fully,
47 47 47 47
to make most subscribers satisfied.
4.2.2 Policy of Selecting Site
On the basis of site selection method mentioned in the former section, this section
gives some polices in the selection further:
1. The density of base station layout should correspond to the traffic distribution
conditions. If a few sites are to be established at the initial stage of network
construction, they should be selected appropriately to guarantee coverage for
important subscribers and highly-populated areas.
2. During the base survey in the urban area, the height of base station should
higher than the average height of buildings but lower than the height of the top
building. For base stations in the micro cells, the height of base station should be
lower than the average height of buildings and the shield of the buildings around
should be good. When surveying base stations in suburban or rural areas, it is
necessary verify if there are large-traffic areas that are likely to be obstructed
around the site.
3. When selecting sites in building groups of the urban area, try to avoid the
situation where the existing tall buildings or new buildings near the antenna
obstruct the area to be covered. Around the selected building is no obvious
barrier. There should be no building blocking the planned sectors pointing to
the main lobe direction.
4. The antenna height should be higher than the average height of surroundings, 10
15 m higher than that in urban area with dense buildings and 15 m higher than
that in suburban and rural areas. The height of building or drawing tower should
meet the requirement of planned antenna height, which cannot 1.3 time higher
than the antenna height.
5. To establish base stations in urban areas, mains supply and lightning protection
grounding systems must be available inside the buildings and the floors must
have sufficient capacity to bear weights with adequate space on the building top
for antenna installation. To establish base stations in suburbs or the countryside,
sufficient infrastructures must be available: reliable mains supply, safe
environment, convenient transportation and facilities for iron tower
establishment.
48 48 48 48
6. Select the equipment room with low rentals and low reconstruction cost.
7. On condition that the base station layout is not affected, select the existing
telecommunication buildings, postal office buildings or microwave stations as
sites as much as possible, and make use of their equipment rooms, power
supplies and iron towers to the greatest extent.
8. When adopting the microwave transmission in the selected site, fully consider
the feasibility, cost and transmission performance of other transmission modes.
9. Try not to adopt rural power for direct power supply in the selected site, which
may affect the normal operation of base station due to unstable voltage.
10. The base stations in urban areas should be placed in one site or in two adjacent
sites as much as possible.
AT present, the operators may have their own overall planning of site selection, and
some sites may have their definite addresses. Our planning & survey engineers can tell
if the site selected by the customer is appropriate according to the above principles. It
not appropriate, they will continue the survey until a better one is found and then they
will propose their suggestions together with reasons to the customer for a final decision
(to confirm it in written form).
4.2.3 Mitigation in Site Selection
During the site selection, it should be specially noted to avoid the following cases:
When planning the WCDMA network, avoid the ring layout of base stations.

Fig. 4.2-1 Ring Layout of Base Stations
49 49 49 49
The purpose is to avoid the hole effect caused by the ring layout. In the ring
layout, the pilot intensity in the hole is not efficient and the surrounding base
stations can affect the hole, and in result the strong pilot pollution is generated.
It will not only impair the coverage in the hole but also impair the capacity of
surrounding base stations. Therefore, lay out base stations following the cell
structure.
1. There should be no barrier around.

Fig. 4.2-2 Barrier of Buildings Around
The barrier of building around has a large effect on the coverage of base stations.
There will be a shadow on the back of the barrier, causing the dead zone of
coverage. The reflection signal from the front of the barrier will bring
interference for the system. Usually, there should be no building 100 m around
the site which is 5 m higher than the site and no broad large building 200 m
around. However, this problem often occurs in the urban area with dense
buildings, which increases the difficulty of site selection in the city.
2. When planning the WCDMA network, avoid the case that the large-traffic object
is remote from the base station.
50 50 50 50

Fig. 4.2-3 Large-Traffic Area Remote from the Base Station
When most subscribers are far from the base station, namely, most subscribers
are on the border of cell, the radio wave on the link will increase and the base
station and user equipment have to increase the transmission power accordingly.
In result, the interference of system increases, the power of base station to every
downlink subscriber increases and both uplink and downlink capacities
decrease.
3. When planning the WCDMA network, avoid the case of the base station
covering base stations.
Coverage area of base station
R1
Base
station
Adjacent
base station
R2

Fig. 4.2-4 Base Station Covering Base Station
Base station covering base station is mainly caused by large height difference
between two adjacent base stations. In this case, the two base stations will
generate pretty large interference, make the user equipment hand off frequently
and in result make the capacities of the two base stations decrease together. To
avoid this case, the antenna height of the base stations should be on the same
51 51 51 51
level.
4. Do not set up base stations in woods. If that is a must, keep their antennas above
the top of trees.
5. Do not set up base stations near the large-power radio transmitter, radar stations
or other strong interference sources. If the above is inevitable, conduct the field
strength interference test first.
Do not set up base stations in high mountains. The base station at a high location
in the urban area has a large interference range. The base station at a high
location in the suburban or rural areas will cause poor coverage for the basin
countryside.
6. Do not set base stations in the border at a high location or too many base stations
in the border to avoid unnecessary dissension.
4.3 Collection of WCDMA Networking Planning Data
4.3.1 Overview
The collection of network planning data is the basis of planning and simulation. The
collection of planning-required data and analysis is closely related to the accurateness
of the network planning result. The subscriber number prediction, traffic model
prediction and user distribution are crucial to the planning. To predict the reasonable
data, the data collected must be rich and accurate. The network planning data mainly
come from the operators.
4.3.2 Project Information
Resources of operators:
1. Whether they have radio resources like equipment room, transmission
equipment and iron tower
2. Whether they have the three-dimension map. The format of electronic map used
is Planet/EET. This format supports the globe models including Krasovsky1940
and WGS84 and projection modes including GaussKruger and UTM.
3. Whether they have the information of existing radio mobile network of the
operator like traffic statistics, site distribution and site information. If yes,
52 52 52 52
provide them otherwise.
4. Whether they have ZTE equipment. If yes, provide the type and running
situation of equipment.
4.3.3 Categorization of Coverage Area
First categorize the coverage area of the planning area by the traffic and surface
features of the coverage area.
The traffic categorization should consider the area size, population, social economy,
fixed call incomes and the distribution of mobile subscribers of competitors. Predict the
penetrability and traffic of services in an area.
Table 4.3-1 Categorized Statistics of Traffic
Service
Type
Bearer
Rate
(UL/DL)
Kbps
Penetrability
Outdoor
Coverage
Rate
Outdoor
Slow
Fading
Standard
Deviation
Indoor
Coverage
Rate
Indoor
Slow
Fading
Standard
Deviation
(dB)
Average
Subscriber
on Busy
Hour (erl)
Blocking
Rate
Average
Subscriber
Throughput
on Busy
Hour
(UL/DL)
bps
Voice
Service
cs12.2/cs
12.2

VIDEO
PHONE
cs64/cs6
4

Low
Data
Service
ps64/ps6
4

Medium
Data
Service
ps64/ps1
28

High
Data
Service
Ps64/ps3
84

Category of surface features: According to the economy of the planning area, it can be
categorized into dense urban area, common urban area, suburb and countryside. It is
necessary to learn the area range, area and subscriber distribution of each section of the
planning area.
53 53 53 53
Table 4.3-2 Categorized Statistics of Surface Features
Type of
Surface
Features
Coverage Coverage Area
Number of
Covered
Subscribers
Dense Urban
Area
Use the street name to identify the closed coverage
area range. Take the northwest level crossing of the
northest street as the start point of the close loop,
named with the street name and called border. Form a
close area from north, east, south, west to north.
Area = Length (west to east)
Width (north to south)

Common
urban area
Use the street name to identify the closed coverage
area range. Take the northwest level crossing of the
northest street as the start point of the close loop,
named with the street name and called border. Form a
close area from north, east, south, west to north.

Suburb
Describe the border of suburb and urban area and take
the street as the boundary.

Countryside
Describe the landform of the countryside clearly only
(land features and surface features)

Note: The coverage range should be marked on the map.
4.3.4 Collection of Existing Resources
If the operators have radio resources which can be used by the WCDMA base stations,
like equipment room, iron tower, power and transmission equipment, it is necessary to
collect the data, as listed in Table 4.3-3.
Table 4.3-3 Statistics of Existing Radio Resources
S
N
Located
Region
Location
Name
Longitude Latitude Address
Floors of
Equipment
Room
Iron
Tower
Power
Resources
Transmission
Resources

54 54 54 54
4.3.5 Information of Important Transportation Line
Table 4.3-4 Information of Important Transportation Line
SN
Name of
Transportation Line
Glass of Road
Length of Important
Transportation Line
Important Areas Passed Through by
the Transportation Line

Note: The transportation line should be marked on the map.
4.3.6 Information of Important Buildings in Urban Areas
Table 4.3-5 Information of Important Buildings in Urban Areas
SN Name of Buildings Longitude Latitude Floor Function Type Structure of Building

Note: The location of important buildings should be marked on the map.
4.3.7 Information of Sites on the Existing Network
Table 4.3-6 Information of Sites on the Existing Network
Base
No.
Base
Name
Longitude Latitude
CS
Type
Altitude
Roof
Height
Antenna
Height
Type of
Iron
Working
Frequency Band

55 55 55 55
It is necessary to make a good communication with the operator about the collection of
network planning data. It is very important to get the acknowledgement of the operator
for the collected data. After the original data are acknowledged, the planning work at
the next stage can be continued successfully. Also, it avoids repeated modification of
planning results due to inaccurate data input.
4.4 Identification of Base Model
4.4.1 Overview
In the radio network planning, besides satisfying the networking requirements of
operators, meet the requirements of the coverage, capacity and QoS of the planning
area with the lowest cost and flexible network solution is the direction and object of
model selection.
Model selection should comprehensively consider the type of coverage area, required
QoS, transmission model in the coverage area, equipment room condition and corollary
power transmission. The WCDMA base stations fall into macro base station, micro cell
base station, repeater and remote radio station usually. Different base stations have
different features and are applicable to different situations.
4.4.2 Requirement Analysis
4.4.2.1 Coverage Requirements
At the initial stage of network establishment, emphasize on the coverage in the
planning area first. The coverage include three aspects, point coverage, line coverage
and plane coverage and two lays, indoor coverage and outdoor coverage. Implement
the fast coverage in important areas to complete continuous coverage in the entire area
by stages. Emphasize on the outdoor coverage at the initial stage to indoor coverage
gradually.
Divide the coverage object according to the average GDP per person in the coverage
area, population distribution, geographical environment and development of
communications market. Usually, the object area is divided into 4 5 categories of
regions.
1. Category-1 region (extra large city like municipality directly under the Central
Government): It has such features as developed economy, large requirement for
56 56 56 56
indoor coverage, high equipment room operation cost, continuous coverage of
high-speed service, many tall buildings in the area and large loss of radio
transmission.
2. Category-2 (important economy-developed city like capital cities): It has such
features as many hotspot and indoor coverage demand, high equipment room
operation cost and requirement of continuous coverage of high-speed service.
3. Category-3 (middle-sized city): It has such features as continuous coverage of
voice and low-speed service, low equipment room operation cost and hotspot
coverage of high-speed service.
4. Category-4 (counties and countries): It adopts large-area voice continuous
coverage in the residential area with many denizens, and in the area with a few
denizens like mountainous areas makes the plane coverage for the residential
area and line coverage for the transportation trunk.
5. Category-5 (region with few persons): In this area, adopt the line coverage for
the transportation trunk, adopt the plane coverage for the residential area and
scenic spot and adopt the low-cost broad coverage for the broad area with
activities.
The above is a general division according to the feature of the object area. A region of a
category may have different features. For example, category-2 region has some
features similar to those of category-1 region. The general features of urban area of
category-1 are similar to the features of category-2. Therefore, during the planning, it is
necessary to make a further division according to the features of the planning area, to
make the model selection more flexible and reasonable.
4.4.2.2 Capacity Requirements
The capacity of radio network should consider two factors. One is to ensure that the
capacity of radio network meets the subscriber requirement predicted for service. The
other is to ensure the capacity of the large-traffic, hotspot area, such as large shop in
the city, large office building and large entertainment places.
Capacity expansion should first consider the low-cost input mode like adding carrier
frequency and increasing the power and then consider setting micro cells in the
important area.
57 57 57 57
4.4.2.3 Cost Requirements
In the precondition of ensuring the coverage and capacity, consider the cost of setting
up base stations. Adopt different ways to reduce the base setup and maintenance costs.
Here follow the work in the cost control:
1. Adopt the coverage object, adopt the proper base stations of some series to meet
the coverage in different situations.
2. According to the voice and data coverage object and requirements at different
establishment stages, set the site, site distance, antenna height, antenna direction
and the features of the equipment properly to meet the best economy in the same
coverage conditions. Fully learn and master the existing transmission network
resources and select the base transmission mode or repeater type according to
these transmission resources properly.
3. The channel board of base station should be configured according to the actual
traffic load. Avoid invalid channel configuration and investment waste.
4. Fully learn the basic resources of the existing network (like transmission,
equipment room and iron tower) and make the best use of them.
5. Learn the details of geographical situations of site and make a correct estimate
for the height of iron tower and other relevant measures.
6. Try to reduce the operation & maintenance costs and reduce the use of
equipment room.
4.5 Introduction to Base Stations
4.5.1 Macro BS
At the initial operation stage of the WCDMA mobile communications network, the
main object of carrier is to adopt the macro cell base stations to make the frame
networking to get the maximum geographical coverage rate. The macro cell is mainly
applicable to the large/middle-sized city with a large service capacity requirement or
focus area of some service applications. Generally, equipment room, transmission
condition, power condition and air condition are required. The macro base station is the
primary base station type in the WCDMA networking.
The macro cell has two types: indoor type and outdoor type. They can be deployed in
58 58 58 58
the urban area with dense crowds and buildings, freeway and countryside. All
equipment supports the receiving diversity and the transmitting diversity is optional.
Indoor base stations have such features as large capacity, flexible configuration and
convenience of upgrade and expansion but they have a high requirement for the
condition of equipment room. Outdoor base stations have such features as all-weather
environment adaptation, AC power, large power and convenience of installation but
they usually have a small capacity. For the place necessary to set base stations but
without equipment room conditions, the outdoor base stations can be adopted.
The ZTE WCDMA indoor macro cell can be configured flexibly according to the
requirement. The primary models include indoor macro base stations ZXWR B18
(18CS) and ZXWR B09 (9CS), and outdoor macro base station ZXWR B09A (9CS)
for typical outdoor macro cell configuration. The configurations of equipment are listed
below:
Table 4.5-1 Indoor Macro Base Station ZXWR B18 Equipment Configuration
Base Name ZXWR B18
Up to 3C6S. 6CS radio frequency remote station can be added
Typical Configurations
In the case of 3S configuration, it supports transmitting diversity and 4-antenna receiving; In
the case of 6S configuration, it supports the receiving diversity.
Support of eight kinds of AMR voice
The uplink and downlink support PS64K, CS64K, PS144K and 384K.
The hardware supports HSDPA.
Service Performance
The hardware supports the AGPS, Cell ID, and OTDOA location service.
Receiving sensitivity - 125dBm, - 130dBm@4-antenna receiving sensitivity
Downlink transmitting power 2 20 W and 2 30 W
Capacity Maximum of 1280 voice channel/rack
Main Performance Indices
Iub Interface Four STM-1 and sixteen E1/T1
Operating Environment
Temperature 0 - 55
Operating Humidity 5% - 95%RH
Power Supply - 48V
Structure Dimensions 1600 600 600 (H W D), in mm
Weight 250 Kg in full configuration

5 55 59 99 9
Table 4.5-2 Indoor Macro Base Station ZXWR B09 Equipment Configuration
CS Name ZXWR B09
Support of OTSR, embedded transmission, embedded power conversion, transmitting
diversity and 4-antenna receiving
Service Performance
Temperature 0 - 55
Operating Humidity 5% - 95%RH
Power Supply - 48V
Table 4.5-3 Outdoor Macro Base Station ZXWR B09A Equipment Configuration
CS Name ZXWR B09A
Support of transmitting diversity and 4-antenna receiving
Service Performance
Receiving Sensitivity - 125dBm, - 130dBm@4-antenna receiving sensitivity
Temperature 0 - 55
Operating Humidity 5% - 95% RH
Power Supply 220 VAC
60 60 60 60
CS Name ZXWR B09A
4.5.2 Micro Cell Base Station
Some dead zones still exist when using macro base stations for the network coverage
and the high traffic in the hotspot region cannot be absorbed well. Therefore, only
using the macro cell base stations for networking cannot achieve a good result. In this
case, the micro cell technology is generated.
The main features of micro cell include:
1. Small coverage range, usually between 100 m and 1000 m, or close to the
coverage radius of macro cell
2. Low overhead power of equipment, usually between 10 mW and 100 mW, or up
to 4 W and 10 W
3. Usually being installed on buildings, simple installation condition requirement
and the radio transmission largely affected by the environment
4. Small volume and convenient and flexible to install
Due to the above features, micro cells can serve as the extension and supplementation
of macro cells, which are mainly used in the two aspects:
1. Improving the coverage rate: Micro cells are mainly used in the region which
the macro cells are different to reach, such dead zones as subway and basement.
2. Improving the capacity: Micro cells are mainly used in the high-traffic area,
such hotspot areas as business street and shopping center.
In the application of improving the capacity, the micro cells and macro cells usually
constitute multilayer network together. The macro cells are mainly responsible for area
coverage and forming the lower layer of the network and the micro cells are
responsible for coverage in dead zones and hotspot areas and forming the upper layer
of the network. In the communication system configurations, micro cells and macro
cells belong to different cells.
In most cases, at the initial stage of network construction, the micro cells are scattered
in hotspot areas. The traffics are centralized, the coverage area is small and the
61 61 61 61
improvement to the capacity is limited.
With the incessant improvement of network construction, the number of sites on the
micro cell layer increases ceaselessly. The transmission cost of micro cell in the entire
equipment investment is larger than the macro cell stations. Therefore, it is very
important to select reasonable network structure and transmission ways according to
the actual situation. The micro cell usually has 1 to 2 carrier frequencies and chain
mode is adopted between micro cells. Four to five micro cells can adopt a pair of
transmission lines to the equipment room to save the transmission cost effectively.
The primary model of the ZTE micro cell base station is ZXWR B03C, whose
configurations are listed below:
Table 4.5-4 Micro Base Station ZXWR B03C Equipment Configuration
Base Name ZXWR B03C
Service Performance
Downlink Transmitting Power 2 10 W and 2 20 W
Iub Interface One STM-1 and four E1/T1
Temperature 0 - 55
Micro cells can either serve as basic coverage or supplementation of coverage. They
can increase with the total of traffic and implement point-to-plane multilayer coverage,
to improve the capacity and performance of network gradually. The use of micro cell
increases the complexity of network, difficulty of planning and construction cost.
However, the micro cell technology can make the best use of limited frequency
62 62 62 62
resources to realize continuous increase of service. Therefore, the use of micro cell is
the necessary result of the development of the WCDMA mobile communication
network.
4.5.3 Remote Radio Station
The remote radio station separates the radio unit and baseband unit. One base band unit
can be connected with multiple radio units through fiber. The radio units can be put in
different places as required to realize the flexible coverage mode. In this case, the
remote radio mode separate the base station into units and make the radio units in a
good place to resolve the coverage in particular regions.
The remote radio base station is draw the macro cell base station to the remote through
fibers to realize the remote coverage. It falls into radio signal remote mode and
intermediate frequency mode. Due to its flexible system structure, it can be applied to
various kinds of radio environment, including the indoor coverage in the buildings in
the urban areas, coverage of shadow area in the urban areas and coverage in the
outlying area. It can save investment and be applied flexibly.
The Node B system can be divided into radio remote module and local base station, as
shown in Fig. 4.5-1.
Local radio unit
Remote
radio unit
Remote
radio unit
Remote
radio unit
Remote
radio unit
Baseband
processing unit

Fig. 4.5-1 Radio Remote Structure
63 63 63 63
The primary model of the ZTE radio remote base station is ZXWR B03R, whose
configurations are listed below:
Table 4.5-5 Remote Radio Station ZXWR B03R Equipment Configuration
Base Name ZXWR B03R
Maximum of 3C1S
Service Performance
Receiving Sensitivity - 125dBm, - 130dBm@4-antenna receiving sensitivity
Downlink Transmitting Power 2 10 W and 2 20 W
Iub Interface One STM-1 and four E1/T1
Temperature 0 - 55
4.5.4 Repeater
With the incessant development of WCDMA mobile communications network, the
coverage problem in indoor dead zones becomes serious. The enhancement of planning
optimization will resolve the problems easy to be found through test in the outdoor
areas basically. The center of communication network construct will shift from the
outdoor coverage to indoor coverage.
There are three ways to realize the indoor coverage:
1. The outdoor macro cells provides the indoor coverage in their coverage range,
which is the most common method adopted in China at present.
2. In case the outdoor macro base stations have redundant capacity, use the repeater
to introduce the signals into the indoor area, covering the indoor dead zone
through the indoor coverage system.
64 64 64 64
3. In the place centralized with traffics, set indoor micro cells and remote radio unit
to resolve the coverage and capacity problems together.
The top buildings are dense in urban areas. The way of providing indoor coverage with
outdoor station has much limitation. In case only using the outdoor station to ensure the
quality of indoor coverage, the signal interference in the outdoor area becomes serious
and difficult to control and even affect the overall planning and network performance
of the network. Moreover, for large areas like shop and entertainment center, only
using outdoor stations cannot achieve a good result.
Using micro cell to resolve the coverage of indoor dead zone has large limitation also.
The equipment input for the micro cell construction is large and the project period is
long. So, it is more suitable for the luxurious auditoria and shop with centralized
traffic.
Due to its flexible and simple features, the repeater becomes an important way to
resolve simple problems, which is often used in places with a low requirement for
capacity, such as small shop and restaurant.
The repeater is mainly used in the following occasions:
1. Expand the service range and eliminate the coverage dead zone.
2. Enhance the field strength in suburb and expand the coverage in suburb.
3. Set the repeaters along the freeway and increase the coverage rate.
4. Resolve the coverage problem of indoor coverage.
5. Realize busy indication.
When installing the repeaters, it is very important to select the antenna feeder system.
Pay attention to the following points:
1. Antenna gain: According to the signal and coverage requirements, select the
proper gain.
2. Antenna direction: Because the repeater belongs to the intra-frequency, the
omni-directional antenna cannot be adopted. Otherwise, it may cause the
spontaneity of system. The main lobe brand of donor antenna should be as
narrow as possible to reduce the introduction of noise. The transmitting direction
of retransmission antenna should be controlled strictly, to prevent the
retransmission signals from being fed into the donor antenna.
65 65 65 65
3. Signal source base: Select the base station with a good quality of signal as the
feed-in source and ensure that the capacity of the base station is large enough.
Otherwise, congestion may occur.
The repeater is an economical and practical solution. The installation of repeaters is
simple and flexible, the models are diversified and the application range is broad. The
repeater is a supplement to the WCDMA communications network construction. Such
places can adopt repeaters as required as hotel, shop, underground park and subway in
the city as well as suburb, villages and towns, countryside, road, railway and scenic
spot. The transmission diagram of repeater in the mobile communications network is
Coverage area of base station
Donor base station Repeater
Coverage area
of repeater

Fig. 4.5-2 Transmission Principle of Repeater
4.5.5 Others
Besides being categorized by equipment type, the base stations can be categorized by
logical structure, falling into omni-directional base station, single-sector base station,
two-sector base station, three-sector base station and multi-sector base station. The
selection of base station model is determined according to the requirement of radio
coverage and traffic load. In the urban areas with large traffic, the three-sector base
station is usually adopted. In the broad area of suburb, to improve the coverage, reduce
the interference and facilitate the network optimization, adjustment and control, it is
suggested for adopting the sectorized base stations in principle. In the coverage area of
small region which is relatively isolated, for example, basin, the omni-directional
repeater can be adopted. For the area of strip-type coverage such as road and valley, the
two-sector base station can be adopted. Particular coverage requirement can select
multi-sector base station as required, for example, besides macro coverage, the separate
66 66 66 66
sector can be selected for coverage of surrounding buildings or shadow.
Moreover, at the initial stage, adopt the power splitter to split the base stations in
suburb and small towns into multi-sector antenna transmission or receiving.
Omni-directional TX Sectorized RX (OTSR) is to resolve the unbalance problem
between uplink and downlink in the case of small network capacity. On the one hand, it
reaches the coverage effect of sectorized base stations and on the other it saves the
investment of equipment. In the subsequent project, according to the traffic load,
upgrade the base stations into the sectorized equipment conveniently.
4.6 Networking Schemes in Typical Surroundings
The networking schemes only provide the possible networking modes. To select a
networking scheme, it is necessary to consider various kinds of factors
comprehensively, especially combining the actual radio transmission environment in
the communications network planning region. On in such way, the best coverage and
capacity can be ensured.
4.6.1 Basic Coverage in Urban Areas and Traffic-Dense Areas
Coverage features:
1. The service demands are centralized, so the equipment should have a large
capacity and high processing capability.
2. The network coverage has a high requirement, so the equipment should have a
flexible coverage capability.
3. Due to the space limit of equipment room, it is necessary to select the equipment
with a small volume.
4. To meet the new service demands sensitively, the equipment should have the
development capability.
On the basis of the coverage features in the service-dense areas, adopt the indoor or
outdoor macro cell base stations of primary models in networking. To use the top
buildings in urban areas or the equipment room of traditional GSM and CDMA base
stations, it is necessary to make the service plan and network plan for site construction.
The capacity of base stations can be adjusted according to the service density and
penetration loss of the coverage area. For the area with high service density, such as
67 67 67 67
airport, station and business district, the coverage radius of base stations can be
reduced and the capacity of base stations can be expanded properly. Adopt the
penetration coverage to cover the indoor dead zones in the building and adopt the
Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) transmission optical ring for transmission, in
particular cases, adopt the microwave link.
Due to the dense GSM and CDMA base stations in the urban areas and short of site
space resources, the difficulty of the planning of the WCDMA communications
network increases and the site range available is smaller. The traditional
communications operators have cell equipment rooms but the cubage situation is poor.
However, new mobile communications operators need to set up new sites. But the
difficulty of setting up new sites increase more and more with the improvement of
peoples living standard, people are more sensitive to the radiation harm from the radio
communication and they are not willing to lease their property to mobile
communication operators for setting up sites, and in result the difficulty for selecting a
new site increases greatly. Moreover, in the developed city, the property rent of site is
30,000 to 50,000 RMB every year, which make the mobile operators spend more
operation costs.
Therefore, new site setup should be considered carefully. The market competivity of
macro cell base stations of primary models for new site should be enhanced. The
primary models should be applicable to both indoor equipment room and outdoor
environment (such as terrace). Such base stations have a large capacity, can realize
several times of expansion in a cabinet and support fiber remote radio function.
4.6.2 Coverage in Suburb and Countryside
Coverage features:
1. The buildings are scattered, the path loss is small and the coverage distance is
large.
2. The traffic is low and income is small. It requires large investment but generates
a small income. The efficiency of building network is low.
3. The range and coverage is broad, the number of sites is small, the sites are
distributed broadly, the landform is complex and the maintenance is difficult.
4. It is outlandish. The corollary equipment such as transmission equipment, power
supply, equipment room and iron tower are difficult to resolve.
68 68 68 68
The base stations in suburb and countryside should meet the coverage requirement first
and then the capacity requirement. The outdoor small integrated macro cell base station
can be adopted. The installation and setup are convenient, especially applicable to the
site environment from away from city and the location not providing DC power. Set up
iron towers or adopt the economical drawing tower or set up site in the proper
geographical location (like highland or peak of mountain). The capacity requirement
for base stations is not high. One or two carrier frequencies are used to meet the
large-area coverage requirement primarily. The transmission can adopt the microwave
link or fiber.
4.6.3 Coverage in Particular Surroundings
Particular surroundings here refer to shop, hotel, business building, exhibition hall,
gymnasium, industrial park, campus of college, station, airport, park, tunnel and
subway. In these surroundings, the radio signals may have four poor aspects: dead
zone of signal, weak zone of signal, conflict zone of signal and busy zone of traffic.
1. Dead zone of signal
Reason: The materials of buildings (like solid, thick armoured concrete) have
the shield function. They make the signal level lower than the receiving
sensitivity of mobile phones after the signals transmitted from outdoor base
stations going through the path loss and penetration loss of buildings, causing
abnormal communication for mobile phones. The typical areas of dead zone are
basement and subway.
2. Weak zone of signal
Reason: The materials of buildings (like armoured concrete and glass curtain
wall) increase the penetration loss of radio surroundings. They make the signal
level close to the receiving sensitivity of mobile phones after the signals
transmitted from outdoor base stations going through the path loss and
penetration loss of buildings, causing poor communication quality for mobile
phones. The typical area of weak zone is in the large-scaled buildings.
3. Conflict zone of signal
Reason: Due to the limit of frequency resources, reduce the base coverage radius
to improve the network capacity and multiplexing of frequencies. It limits the
antenna height. In this case, the radio signals in the top buildings may come
69 69 69 69
from many cells (most are unstable reflection signals from the ground and wall).
It will cause the frequent handoff (ping-pong effect) and even affect the normal
communication of mobile phones. Typical area of signal handoff is top buildings
(area above 15 floors).
4. Busy zone of traffic
Reason: In some areas with a large people flow, there are many mobile
subscribers. The capacity of outdoor macro cell base stations cannot meet the
communication requirements, leading to block of communication and in result
subscribers unable to access the mobile communications network for normal
communication. The typical area of busy zone includes large business district,
gymnasium, exhibition center and station.
It is necessary to analyze the specific situation of the above problems. For dead zone
and weak zone, resolve the poor signal source problem by setting up intra-frequency or
inter-frequency indoor micro cell, repeater and remote radio station. On this basis, use
the indoor antenna system to distribute the radio signals to different indoor places
equably. The indoor antenna system includes passive coaxial distributed antenna
system, active coaxial distributed antenna system, fiber distribution antenna system and
leaky cable. In the application, they can be adopted flexibly according to the actual
situation. The problem of conflict zone can also by resolved by laying out the indoor
distributed system. In the dead zone, resolve the problem of super large capacity
requirement through the hierarchical networking mode. On the basis of macro base
station coverage, set up the inter-frequency micro cell to absorb some traffic to lessen
the capacity pressure.
4.6.4 Coverage along Freeway and Railway
Coverage features:
1. The coverage area is of strip-type. There are no buildings almost, the path loss is
small and the coverage distance is large.
2. The block from landform may exist, for example, the shadow of mountain.
3. The number of subscribers is small but they have the data service requirement.
4. The corollary equipment is difficult to equip, the efficiency of constructing
network is low and the maintenance is difficult.
70 70 70 70
The landform along freeways and railways are complex and diversified. During
implementing the seamless coverage of freeways and railways, the following points
should be considered in the base model selection:
Try to adopt macro cells in the place where the large-area coverage can be realized like
plain and town. You can also install tower amplifiers to expand the coverage range. Set
up sites on the corner of roads in a mountainous area to reduce the block of mountain.
If the road beside the corner is straight, adopt the proper antenna to make the base
station cover a longer distance. You can use the macro cell bi-directional base station or
single-cell bi-directional base station. Try to adopt the omni-directional base station
(the traffic not close to the road and railway section of town is small, omni-directional
station is simple and economical) in the case of being able to meet the coverage
requirement. For the mountainous areas with block, you can adopt the repeater. When
setting up sites in the mountainous areas, you can embed the micro cell in the macro
cell or use the repeater to realize the continuous coverage or signals.

71 71 71 71
5 Tools using in the Survey of Network
Planning
5.1 GPS Principle & Application
5.1.1 GPS Structure
GPS is the Global Positioning System established in 1994, comprising space
constellation, ground monitoring and user equipment.
There are totally 25 satellites for GPS at present, running on six elliptic orbits more
than twenty thousand kilometers above the ground.
5.1.2 GPS Principles
Working principle: The receiver tracks, captures and locks the satellite signals through
phase, collects satellite ephemeris, measures the pseudo range, calculates the latitude,
longitude and altitude of the position where the receiver resides. The 2D positioning is
applied in capturing three satellites and the 3D positioning is applied in capturing more
than four satellites. The precision for positioning becomes higher with more and more
satellites captured.
5.1.3 Name and Function of the GPS Panel Keys
5.1.3.1 GPS12C/GPS12XLC Panel
Tail of the instrument
Display
are
Operation
area
Fig. 5.1-1 Schematic Diagram of the GPS Panel
72 72 72 72
5.1.3.2 Name and Function of the Keys
Table 1.1-1 Name and Function of the Keys
SN Key Name Function
1 Bulb key
For switching on/off the machine and controlling the strength of
the backlight of the L3 screen
2
Page Up/Down
key
For displaying the main pages in cycle or returning to the main
page from a sub-page.
3 Enter
For activating the highlighted part, confirming menu options and
inputting data
4 ESC key
For displaying the previous page or recovering the value of the
selected data area
5 Label key For marking the current position as a way point
6 Navigation key For reaching to a way point directly
7
Up, Down, Left
and Right key
For moving the cursor upward, downward, to left and to right, and
the Up and Down can help select digits and letters
5.1.4 Basic Operations
Note
To make your operation indoors easy, select Function setting > Operation > Mode >
Similator.
5.1.4.1 Bring-up, Bring-down, Illumination and Power Supply
Bring-up: Hold the GPS and set the level of its internal antenna facing the sky.
Constantly press the bulb key for about one second, and a bring-up page appears and a
satellite capture (receiving status) page is displayed, as shown in Figure 2a.
Brightness adjustment: Press the bulb key to adjust the backlight of the screen. This
function is only used at night or in poor light.
Bring-down: Press the bulb key for about two seconds.
The instrument applies four No.5 batteries. To change the batteries, bring down the
machine and turn the metal ring at the tail of the instrument, as shown in Figure 1, to
take out the batteries. Upon completion, bring up the machine.
5.1.4.2 Initialization Setting
GPS12C/GPS12XLC is the concurrent 12-channel receiver with a high sensitivity, and
73 73 73 73
it can locate fast without any initialization generally before use. In addition, it has a fast
initialization functions, including AUTO-LOCATE (automatic location), COUNTRY
(country selection) and continuous research (NONE-INIT).
Tips: Bring up the machine, and the picture showing the satellite status pops up. Press
Enter to enter the menu of initialization mode selection.
Initialization is necessary in the following cases. If you know the approximate latitude
and longitude coordinate of a position, you may input the latitude and longitude in the
navigation page to accelerate the location speed.
1. The first use after delivery.
2. The receiver keeps away from the previous satellite after its power-off, for over
500 miles.
3. The memory of the receiver is cleared and the data stored in it are lost.
5.1.4.3 Establishment of Way points
1. After the completion of positioning, press the label key to enter the page for the
marked position.
2. Point positioning for average value (This step is optional, but recommended in
general)
3. Press the Up/Down key to move the cursor to the way point. Press Enter to enter
the input status. Press Up/Down key to input the name of way points to be used
(constituted by letters and numbers, in the form of area name abbreviation + way
point name abbreviation, six bits at most)
4. Press Enter to move the cursor to the saving place, and press Enter for
confirmation.
5. In the marked position page, there is another line for adding a navigation line, in
which the name of a navigation line is entered.
Hereto, a way point and a navigation line have been established. To return to the page
for function setting by pressing the Page key, select the nearest way point menu to see
the straight-line distance and the azimuth angle between the current position and the
nearest established way point, this value cannot be saved for long but updated in
real-time along with the changes of the position. Keep records in real-time if you need
it.
74 74 74 74
The nearest navigation-point function is very useful to the real-time measurement of
the distance and the angle between the way points, so it is highly recommended.
5.1.4.4 Point Positioning for Average Value
This function is aimed at improving the precision of point positioning and minimizing
the error.
The detailed operation is as follows:
1. Press the positioning key to enter the Marked Position page.
2. Use the Cursor key to move the cursor to Average, highlight it, and then press
Enter. In this case, the machine becomes smooth.
3. The smaller the smooth reference value at the Error is, the higher the precision
becomes.
4. If the digit at Error is fixed or reaches the expected value, move it to Save, and
press Enter to complete the saving.
5.1.5 Basic Information

a b c d
Fig. 5.1-2 GPS
5.1.5.1 Page for Receiving Satellite Signals
It is the first page shown after bring-up, as shown in Figure 1.4-1a. Below is the
description of it:
1. The figure shows the distribution of satellites.
2. Satellite direction: North upwards and south downwards, west to the left and
east to the right
75 75 75 75
3. Satellite elevation angle: Its center is equivalent to the right top of the place
where a satellite resides. The big circle represents the horizon, and the circle in
the middle is in a 45
o
pitch. The elevation angle becomes larger when the
satellite comes closer to the center.
4. Satellite number: The numbers in the figure indicate the satellites in the upper
part of the horizon, and the highlighted numbers mean not receiving the satellite.
5. Black-bar diagram: indicates the strength of the received satellite signal, and the
higher the black bar is, the stronger the signal becomes. If there is no black bar
but box bar, this satellite is in the tracing state. Once the box bar is locked, it
will become the black bar. If there are no black bar and box bar, the signal of
this satellite is not received. Generally speaking, the nearer the satellite in the
circle comes to the center, the larger the pitch of the satellite becomes, and the
stronger the received satellite signal becomes.
6. Indicator of battery voltage: There is a black bar to the upper left, which
represents the battery voltage. If the battery electric voltage is high, the black
bar is long.
7. EPE value: Located at the upper right corner, indicating the current estimated
positioning error in the unit of M or FT.
8. The upper left corner indicates the current working status of the receiver,
including:
9. Satellite search: GPS is searching the visual satellites.
10. Capture satellite: GPS is receiving information from the visual satellite, but it is
impossible to calculate the 2D position based on the current information.
11. 2D navigation: The machine can implement the 2D positioning until it receives
at least three satellites with a good geometric factor. For example, it displays
2D DIFF (2-dimensional difference) in the case of differential status.
12. 3D navigation: The machine can implement the 3D positioning until it receives
at least four satellites with a good geometric factor. For example, it displays 3D
DIFF (3-dimensional difference) in the case of differential status.
13. Use failure: the incorrect initialization or abnormal satellite status. The receiver
cannot be used, so it should be shut down for initialization.
76 76 76 76
5.1.5.2 Data Query
Description of the positioning page, as shown in Table 5.1-1b, as shown in the table
below:
Table 5.1-1 Description of Positioning Page
Sequence Meaning
Line 1 Direction staff: direction of the course and inclination with the north direction
Line 2
Digital representation of course and speed. The meaning of course is the same
as that in Line 1, only differing in representation; the course and speed cannot
be used unless the receiver runs, it means the direction of speed of the current
movement. Its angle increases starting from 0
o
.
Line 3
Voltage and height: Voltage has the functions of an odometer. Height is
valid upon 3D positioning, through which the relative height of two different
way points can be measured.
Line 4 The latitude and longitude value for the current receiver position.
Line 5
It is the current GPS time. The satellite clock time-telling is applied, without
the need of changing and correction.
Caution:
In the process of positioning, observe the precision of GPS (EPE value), which should
be less than five meters, in the following ways:
The first way is to capture the EPE value at the upper right corner of the satellite page,
as shown in Table 5.1-1a.
The second way is to press the label key to enter the marked position page, and use the
Up/Down key to move the cursor to Average. Press Enter and the GPS starts to
calculate the average value until the number at Error is fixed or reaches the expected
value.
5.1.5.3 Track Page
1 This page is used to display the your position and track.
2 The upper left of the page is the scale. Press Enter here, and the mantissa of the
number becomes dark. Press Up/Down key to adjust the scale range (0.5 KM
600 KM) you need. Press Enter to exit after selection.
3 The up/down arrow in the upper middle part is the cursor key. Press Enter here
and press the cursor key to move pictures. In this case, you select any one point
77 77 77 77
for positioning.
4 At the Pencil head in the upper right end of the picture page, you can set the
tracks and graphs.
5.1.6 Navigation Operation
5.1.6.1 Navigating by Navigation Pages
1 Press the navigation key to show the way point page.
2 Use the up/down/right/left key to select the number or name of the way point to
be reached.
3 Press Enter for confirmation, and GPS automatically returns to the navigation
page, and it can calculate the azimuth, distance and mileage from the place
where you reside and the way point.
5.1.6.2 Starting Navigation
1 Use the page key to turn to the compass or expressway page. Press Enter to
show a selection menu, and press Up/Down key to select a compass or an
expressway. Press Enter to select them into the appropriate page (the compass
page is shown in Table 5.1-1c).
2 In the compass page, on the right top is the name of the way point to be reached,
in the middle is a compass display, and the arrows show the angle of deviation.
The arrow pointing to the right top indicates no deviation of the angle. There are
such information as orientation, distance, course and speed.
3 The course is displayed in the expressway page, and the four kinds of
information displayed in the upper part is the same as above.
5.1.6.3 Removing a Way-Point
1. Press the page key to turn to the page of function setting, as shown in Table
5.1-1d.
2. Press the up/down cursor key to the options of way-point and press Enter to
show the way-point page.
3. Press the up/down key to select the way point to be removed, and press Enter to
show a selection menu, and then press the up/down key to select Remove; press
Enter to show the query page, press the up/down cursor key to select Yes, and
78 78 78 78
press Enter to remove this way point.
4. In the way-point page, there is the option for removing all way-points. Select it
to remove all the way-points (applying it with care).
5.1.6.4 Navigating by Courses
1. Set up the way points on the course, or directly use the originally set way points.
2. Press the page key to enter the function setting page, as shown in Table 5.1-1d.
Press the up/down key to select a course, and press Enter to enter the course
page.
3. Select a course number and press Enter.
4. Press Enter for confirmation, and the cursor automatically moves to the next line.
Press Enter to input the way-point number. Press the up/down/right/left key to
input a way point, and press Enter for confirmation after the completion of
input.
5. After inputting all the way points in the above way, you can set the direction of
the course in the bottommost line, positive direction or opposite direction, and
you can clear this course. Positive direction means starting from the first
way-point of a course and navigating in the positive direction.
6. Course change: includes the clearance, modification, addition and deletion of a
course. In the course page, select a course number to be modified, and press the
up/down key to select a way point to be modified. Press Enter to enter the
modification page, and then press the up/down key to select the way of
modification. Press Enter for confirmation.
5.1.7 Function Setting
GPS has a complete set of functions. Mastering the function setting is the key for using
this machine, which is sure to meet your different requirements. For the input method
of function setting, refer to Basic Operation.
Below is the description of the common function setting. For the function setting page,
refer to Table 5.1-1d.
5.1.7.1 System Setting
1. MODE: Normal: The receiver receives satellite signals to locate and navigate;
79 79 79 79
Simulator: Used for contact at home and input of way points and courses, in this
case, the receiver does not receive any satellite signals.
2. OFFSET: You can input the local time-zone number. For example, China should
be in East Time Zone: 8h East, that is, input +08:00.
3. CONTRAST: Adjust the black-white contrast of the screen; press Enter to adjust
through the left/right key.
4. LIGHT: Set the duration of the backlight, ranging from 0 to 240 s at six levels.
5. TONE: Three settings, no prompt tone, information prompt, information and key
prompt tone, MSG and KEY.
5.1.7.2 Navigation Setting
1. Format of marked positions: way of displaying the positioning result, which is
generally set as hddd.ddddd, that is, the degree form.
2. (Coordinate system) MAP DATUM: Set as WGS84 in general
3. UNITS: for those navigation parameters as distance, speed and so on, which are
in three systems: metric system, marine system and British measurement, but the
metric system is recommended.
4 Direction: Definition of the positive north. There are four kinds, automatic,
positive north, user-defined and gridding.
5.1.7.3 Interface Setting
There are five ways of the GPS input/output: None/None,NMEA/NMEA,
GRMN/GRMN,RTCM/ and RTCM/NMEA. NMEA/NMEA is selected generally.
1. NMEA/NMEA: GPS outputs the information about satellite positioning under
the globally standard NMEA0180,0182 and 0183 (1.5/2.0) protocols.
2. GRMN/GRMN: GPS owns the dedicated transfer protocol of GARMIN and can
transmit information about way points, courses and satellite ephemeris with
other types of GARMIN receiver; it can be equipped with the PCX5 software of
GARMIN and can transmit the above information between it and PC, which can
be downloaded and uploaded.
3. RTCM/: receives the real-time differential correction data of RTCM
SC-104 2.0, and the Baud rate can be freely adjusted from 300 to 9600. The
80 80 80 80
GPS precision after difference can reach 1 to 5 m.
4. RTCM/NMEA: The receiver RTCM outputs the NMEA data while differencing
signals, and can adjust the parameters such as frequency and data transmission
rate for receiving the GBR21 beacon of GARMIN.
5.1.8 Performance Specifications
5.1.8.1 Physical Indices
1. Shell: Water-proof, sand-resistance and quake-proof, under the American
MIL-810 Standard
2. Dimensions: 12.4 mm x 13.3 mm x 6 mm
3. Weight: 0.255 kg
5.1.8.2 Battery Indices
1. Power consumption: 0.75 miliwatt (no backlight used) in normal case
2. Power supply: 5 ~ 40 VDC (GPS12XLC)
3. 5 ~ 8 VDC (GPS12C)
5.1.8.3 Environmental Parameters
1. Operating temperature: -25C ~ +75C
2. Storage temperature: -40C ~ +80C
3. Humidity: 95% not condensed
5.1.8.4 Performance Features
1. Receiver: 12 parallel channels, which can simultaneously track 12 satellites.
2. Search time: Hot startup: 15 second; cold startup: 30 seconds; automatic
positioning: 75 seconds; sky searching: 2.5 minutes; re-capturing: 1 second.
3. Positioning: 10 m.
4. Speed precision: 0.4 kts RMS (at the regular speed).
5. Dynamic: Limited speed: 999 kts; acceleration limit: 6g; Jerk limit: 61m/s3.
6. Interface: NMEA0183 output; RTCM real-time differential input.
7. Storage point: 500 way points; 1,000 track points
81 81 81 81
5.2 Principle and Application of a Laser Rangefinder
Knowledge
This chapter involves the principle and application of a laser rangefinder.
5.2.1 Name and Function of the Panel Keys on a Laser Rangefinder
5.2.1.1 Schematic Diagram of a Laser Rangefinder Panel
3 Measurement
reference edge
5 Distance measurement,
tracking
6 Multiply [x]/delay
measurement
9 Clear (return-to-zero)
10 Switch
11 Equal, Enter
12 Minus [-]
13 Pythagorus'theorem
function
14 Minimum/maximum
tracking measurement
15 Store/save
Keyboard

Fig. 5.2-1 Rangefinder Panel
82 82 82 82
5.2.1.2 Schematic Diagram of Display
1 Laser started
Di spl ay scr een
2 Measurement reference edge (Leading
edge/instrument support/trailing edge)
3 Information
4 Calculation display
5 Primary display (such as: the
currently measured distance)
6 Distance measurement
7 Tracking measurement
8 Area/dimension
9 Minimum tracking measurement
10 Maximum tracking measurement
11 Pythagorus'theorem function
12 Using the Pythagorus'theorem to
measure the partial height
13 Units, including power and cube (2/3)
14 Countdown display for delay measurement
15 Storage constant
16 Contact with the repair personnel
17 Three extra displays (such as:
Measurement mean value)
18 (SET) Exit from the setting
19 (Reset) Restore to factory settings
20 Display of battery recharge volume
21 Constants for invoking storage (10 at most)
22 Invoking the last 15 measurement values
23 Illumination (on/off)
24 Buzzer (on/off)
25 Measurement with constants

Fig. 5.2-2 Rangefinder Display
5.2.2 Operation Description
The laser rangefinder is shown in the figure below:

Fig. 5.2-3 Rangefinder Display
83 83 83 83
5.2.2.1 Battery Installation/Replacement
1. Press the dismount button and push the back cover to the right and take it out.
2. Open the battery slot cover and put the batteries in.
When the electrical voltage of a battery is too low, there will be this signal on
the display.
For the model of battery, refer to Technical Parameter.
Correctly install the batteries by polarities.
Only the alkaline battery can be used.
3. Insert the back cover in along the slot until it reaches the right position.
5.2.2.2 Enabling/Disabling DISTO
Press the button quickly.
The illumination, battery charge volume and buzzer are displayed until the first work
command is delivered.
This instrument can be shut down in any menu at any time.
The instrument will be automatically shut down if the keyboard is unused within
90 seconds.
5.2.2.3 Clear Key
It can restore the instrument to the normal mode, that is, restore it
to zero (= clear).
The clear key can be used before/after measurement/calculation.
In a function (area or dimension), the clear key can be used to return to the previous
instruction for measurement.
5.2.2.4 Illumination
This button can be used to control the illumination.
The illumination will be automatically shut down if the key is unused in 30
seconds.
84 84 84 84
5.2.2.5 Setting the Measurement Reference Edge
Constantly press it until the needed reference edge appears.
The possible position of the reference edge:
Leading
edge
nstrument
fulcrum
Trailing edge

Fig. 5.2-4 Measurement Reference Edge
1. There is a junction for the 1/4 camera tripod at the back of an instrument.
2. The setting of the measurement reference edge cannot be changed unless it is
done again or the instrument is shut down.
3. If set by the manufacturer, the measurement reference edge is rear edge.
5.2.2.6 Measurement
1. Distance for measurement
Press this button to start the laser. In this case, the instrument is in pointing
mode.
Press it for the second time to measure the distance.
After this, the measurement results can be displayed on the screen in the selected
unit.
The instrument is started but the laser is not. In this case, it is called
Normal-mode.
When the laser is also started, it is the pointing-mode.
2. Measurement made on the surface of the plane.
85 85 85 85

Fig. 5.2-5 Plane Measurement
Turn an angle of 90
o
to stably place the instrument onto the measurement
surface.
3. Measurement from a corner

Fig. 5.2-6 Measurement from a Corner
Constant (tracking) measurement
Constantly press this button until it is displayed on the screen.
The constant measurement starts and the real-time distance is displayed on
the screen.
Press this button to end the constant measurement. The last result is
displayed on the screen.
For example, distance measurement

Fig. 5.2-7 Tracing Measurement
86 86 86 86
4. Constant emission of laser
Constantly press this button until you hear a long buzz. At this time, the
laser is constantly started.
After this, press this button every time to make a measurement.
Press this button to disable the constant emission of laser.
Delayed measurement
In this case, it must be in reading mode.
Press this button until the time for delaying measurement that you hope
appears (60 seconds at most).
is displayed on the screen.
Release this button to display the time left for the measurement (counted down
as 59, 58, 57), and the last five seconds are elapsed along with buzz.
For example, the measurement without using keys

Fig. 5.2-8 Measurement Without Using Keys
5.2.2.7 Area Calculation
1. Area
Constantly press this button until is displayed on the screen.
The side to be measured flashes.
The measurement should be made two times and the results of them are
displayed on the screen.
87 87 87 87
2. Volume
Press this button until
is displayed on the screen and the side to be measured flashes.
The measurement should be made for three times (H x W x D).
The area and the result of the three measurements are displayed on the screen.
5.2.2.8 Menu/Setting
This instrument can be set as per your needs.

Fig. 5.2-9 Special Setting
1. The measurement with the added constant (plus/minus)
2. Unit setting
3. Buzzer (ON/OFF)
4. Reset
1) Start menu
Constantly press this button until the menu options you need are
displayed, or press the (+ ) key to select the menu options you need.
This button is for confirming your selection and making the menu
option you selected valid.
Press this button or press the (+ ) key to change your selection.
This button is for confirming your selection and restoring the normal
mode.
88 88 88 88
Here, you may also use the reset key, such as clearing your selection.
2) Unit setting
Units available for your selection:

Fig. 5.2-10 Units Available for Selection
3) The measurement with adjustment values

Fig. 5.2-11 Measurement with Adjustment Values
4) Start menu option
Flashes on the display. Use the (+ ) to select a value to be adjusted (equivalent
to the adjustment of measurement reference edge), such as 0.015 mm; press this
button to select it fast.
Press this button to make a big adjustment.
The adjustment value can be a positive one or a negative one.
This button is for confirming the setting.
When the adjustment is not a zero, the display will constantly show this
value.
The measurement result can include the adjustment value.
89 89 89 89
Using this function can help measure the skeleton.
Please form a habit of restoring the adjustment value of DISTO to 0.000 after
the measurement of the skeleton, and the procedure is as follows:
Press this button.
Confirm a function.
Make an effective measurement after reset or restoration.
5) Reset.
Start a menu option.
flashes on the display.
Use the (+ ) key to select the items to be restored, including:
Store/save.
Storage and constant measurement.
When there are more things in the display such as measurement reference unit,
the following values can be restored:
measurement with constants added (=0), buzzer (enabled), unit (m)
The selected item is restored and the test mode returns.
5.2.3 Function
5.2.3.1 Saving the Measurement Value (Constant)
1. Measurement/calculation of the values you need (such as, height, area,
dimension)
Flashes on the display.
Use the (+ ) key to set the needed values (from 2.297 to 2.300)
Press this button simultaneously to make a big adjustment.
90 90 90 90
Press this button to adjust units (2/3).
This debugging is only applicable to , and or
Confirm
A digit (= memory address) flashes.
Use the (+ ) key to select the memory address (0 - 10).
Save;
2. Invoke the constant again.
The first stored constant is on the display (such as 2.300).
Use the (+ ) key to select the memory address (1-10) you need.
Confirmation. This constant can continue to be used (such as calculating
areas)
3. Invoke the last one measurement value (constant).
Constantly press this button for two times.
The last one measurement value will be displayed in the screen.
Use the (+ ) key to select the constant (15 at most) you need.
Confirmation. This constant can continue to be used (such as calculating
areas).
91 91 91 91
5.2.3.2 Tracing Measurement The Minimum Value

Confirm the minimum measurement value, such as, measure the height of a room
without confirming a right angle.
Use DISTO to roughly aim at an target.
Press this button quickly to start the constant measurement function.
DISTO shakes around the target in a wide range.
Press this button to stop measurement.
At this time, the minimum measurement value is displayed (such as, 3.215 m = room
height).
Two planes (such as, floor/ceiling, wall) must be in parallel basically.
5.2.3.3 Tracing Measurement The Maximum Value

Determine the maximum measurement value, such as:
Determine the opposite angle of a room.
92 92 92 92
Use DISTO to roughly aim at an target.
Press this button quickly to start the constant measurement function.
DISTO sweeps the opposite angle slowly to left/right.
Stops the constant measurement.
At this time, the maximum measurement value is displayed (such as, 12.314m = the
length of the diagonal line in the room).
5.2.3.4 Calculation Function, Partial Height, Partial Measurement Setting
Press the (+) key to make the plus/minus calculation. Make the measurement again.
= Result.
The same method can be used to implement the serial measurement (multiple
measurements needed), or to add multiple area/dimension results together.
In any step of the calculation process, return-to-zero can be achieved before the
calculation result is obtained.
Multiply
Measure (such 8. 375 m)
Implement the function of the multiply key (x).
Continue to measure (such as 3.500 m)
= area (such 29.313)
After obtaining the area, this function can continue to be used for dimension
calculation. This function is to use partial height/measurement setting to obtain the
area/dimension.
5.2.3.5 Measurement Value Doubled
It can double the measurement value in a very convenient way, for example, to obtain
93 93 93 93
the perimeter of a room.
Use the (+) key for addition.
Continue to measure.
= result (half the perimeter)
Use the (+) key for repeating.
= result (perimeter).

5.2.3.6 Using the Pythagorean Proposition for Height and Width
You must make the measurement following the order below.
Two or three measurement points should be vertical (level) to the wall.
Each distance measurement is OK.
- Simple measurement
- Storage of measurement constants
- Using the delay measurement
For the short-distance measurement, the measurement ruler can be used.
Use the fixed rotation point (rear edge, fulcrum of the instrument) to make the laser
rotate with the rotation point as the axis, thus improving the measurement precision.
Do not place it on the camera. On the cameramount, the laser is 70 to 100 mm away
from the rotation point, which may result in an obvious deviation.
94 94 94 94
5.2.3.7 Measurement Based on Two Points

Obtain the height/width of a building. When the result of height should be obtained
after two or three measurements, the measurement can be made in the former place
without the need of setting up a support.
is displayed in the screen, the laser is started and the display flashes with 1.
The above point displays (1).
Under measurement. Do not shake!
Result display
2 flashes, displaying that the DIST is approximately parallel with (2).
Press this button to make the constant measurement.
Stop measurement. The needed height or width is to be displayed.
5.2.3.8 Measurement Based on Three Points

95 95 95 95
Result display
2 flashes, displaying that the DIST is approximately parallel with (2).
Press this button to make the constant measurement. DISTO shakes around the
target in a wide range.
Stop measurement.
The measurement result is displayed and 3 is displayed in flashes.
Aim at the third point.
All the heights or widths can be displayed.
5.2.3.9 Measurement of Partial Height Based on Three Points

Use three measurement points to obtain the distance between Point 1 and Point 2.
96 96 96 96
The measurement result is displayed and 2 is displayed in flashes.
Result display
3 is displayed in flashes.
Press this button to make the constant measurement.
Stop the constant measurement. The height or width between Point 1 to Point 2
can be displayed.
5.2.3.10 User Information
1. Measurement range
Usually, the laser is used for tracing outdoors in the day, and the target should be
in the shadow.
2. Increase of measurement range:
The measurement range may increase a little at night or dusk or when the target
is in a shadow.
3. Shortening of the measurement range
The rough green or blue surface may shorten the measurement range (Both
vegetation and trees can have the same effect).
5.2.3.11 Rough Surface
Upon measuring a rough surface, such as a cement wall, the mean value of the light
point is to be displayed.
To avoid taking the value of brick joint upon rough measurement, use the target board,
such as the 3 M POST-IT, or cardboard.
97 97 97 97
5.2.3.12 Measurement of Transparent Surface
To avoid any error in measurement, do not make measurement on the colorless liquid
(water) or glass (dust-free) surface.
If traversing a piece of glass or there are many targets in one place, the vacancy
measurement will occur.
5.2.3.13 Measurement of Humid, Smooth or High-Luster Surface
1. If the aiming angle is very small, the laser will be reflected, which make
DISTO unable to receive the weakened signal (No. 255 error will appear in the
display;
2. In the case of aiming in a right angle, the laser reflection is too strong (No. 256
error will appear in the display);
Measurement of inclined or round plane
When the target is so big that the laser point can be projected on it, the
measurement can be made.
Bare-handed aiming (about 20 ~ 40 m)
Use a chopping block, 563875 (DIN C6) or 723885 (DINA4)
30 m from the white side:
30 m from the brown side:
5.2.3.14 Field Measurement
DISTO CLASS 5 has an integrated telescope collimator with twifold magnification.
Upon measuring in a distance of more than 25 m from a target, the laser point is
displayed in the center of the collimator, and within 25 m, it is displayed on the edge.

Fig. 5.2-12 Telescope View
98 98 98 98
5.2.4 Technical Parameters
Technical Parameter
Measurement precision (trip measurement
standard deviation)
Minimum display unit
Range measurement
Measurement time Measurement/tracking
Facula diameter of the laser beam (distance)
Integrated diopter
Illumination
Multi-row display
Multifunctional base
Delay measurement
Calculator
Tracking measurement
Constant
Maximum/minimum tracking measurement
Pythagorus' theorem
Memory (storage)
Battery, model AA, 2x1.5V
Dust-proof, splashing-proof
Dimension and weight
Measurement precision of level tester
Standard: +/- 3 mm/
Max.: +/- 5 mm
1 mm
0.2 m to 200 m * **
5 about 4 s /
0.16. about 1 s
6/30/60 mm(10/50/100 m)

10 values

15 values
To the 10,000 th measurement (only
limited to the alkaline battery!)
IP54 acc. IEC529: splashing-
proof, dust-proof
172 x 73 x 45 mm, 335 g
1*

Temperature range
Storage
Use

Fig. 5.2-13 Technical Parameters
The right to change the technical data is reserved.
1. The minimum display unit is 1 cm for the measurement range of 100 m.
2. The long-distance measurement of +/5ppm (+ 0.5mm/100m) includes the
close-quarters error.
99 99 99 99
5.2.5 Signal
Error signal
Such a signal is displayed on the screen.
Signal
203
204
252
253
Cause
Dimension error upon
using Pythagorus theorem
Calculation error
Too high temperature,
exceeding 50o (Measurement)
Too low temperature,
exceeding -10 o (Measurement)
Solution
To measure in the
correct order
To operate again
To cool down the instrument
To warm up the instrument

Fig. 5.2-14 Schematic Diagram 1 of Error Signal
Signal
255
256
257
260
Cause
The received signal is too weak and
the measurement distance is too
large, distance < 200 m
The received signal is too
strong
Measurement error, too bright
background
Laser interruption
Other signals
Solution
To use a sight vane, measurement
time > 10 s
To use a sight vane (the
correct side)
To use a sight vane
To operate again
Contact the servicing department

Fig. 5.2-15 Schematic Diagram 2 of Error Signal
If this signal appears for many times in measurement, switch on/off the instrument.
If the error signal still appears, contact the repair personnel.
5.2.6 Maintenance
Protect the optical part of the instrument just like eyeglass, camera and telescope.
100 100 100 100
5.3 Use and Selection of Digital Camera
5.3.1 Brief Introduction
In the site survey, the digital camera should be applied. It is used for photographing the
environment of the planned area or around the site as well as the roof of a site.
This specification is applied in the phase of requirement analysis, electrical
measurement and site survey of network planning, as well as in the phase of network
optimization.
5.3.2 Specifications
Digital camera is an important auxiliary tool for information recording, the pictures
taken is an important means of propagation model for the project manager to judge the
necessity of site survey and the applicability of a planned area environment. To ensure
the correctness and comprehensiveness of the information recorded in the digital
photos, specify the following requirements on the use of the digital camera.
5.3.2.1 Preparations before Departure
1. Flash memory capacity: Make sure to meet the need of photographing. If it is
too small, it should be cleared.
2. Battery capacity: Make sure that the rechargeable batteries of the camera are full.
For the camera using No. 5 battery, a set of spare batteries should be available,
especially for the survey in the remote areas.
3. Youd better take two pictures for a try to ensure that your camera can normally
work. You should try the data line or PC software in your camera upon receiving
it.
5.3.2.2 Camera Setting
1. Setting the quality of pictures: The survey personnel can select an appropriate
picture quality based on the survey job on that day, considering the quantity of
40 ~ 80 pictures per day, the capacity of the flash memory and the quality of
pictures. The picture quality of 800 x 600 is recommended.
2. In the setting of a camera, you should pay attention to the display of date and
time, for the convenience of information management later on.
3. Set the mode of distant view and improve the sharpness of the pictures taken
101 101 101 101
around the site environment.
4. The camera has the function of adjusting parameters such as shutter, depth of
field and sensitivity. It is required to use auto mode so as to avoid differences in
picture quality due to personal reasons.
5.3.2.3 Photographing Requirements
Upon photographing the environment around a site, you should adjust the focus of your
camera to minimum, to ensure the maximization of view-finding range. Do not adjust
the focus with the digital function.
Upon photographing the environment around a site, the sky should occupy 1/4 ~ 1/5 of
the whole picture in the view-finder window. Note: Keep the level of the horizon in the
picture.
Note: Do not shake upon photographing, especially in darkness or in the case of
long-time exposure.
Upon taking the picture of the environment around a site, you should do it starting
from the right north and take each in every 45clockwise. Upon using a compass to
determine the direction of photographing, it is recommended to determine a reference
object with the compass, and use the camera for photographing based on the reference
object, to ensure the correctness of the photographing direction. The picture of the
environment around a site must be taken levelly, and photographing in vertical position
is not allowed; for the case of irregular buildings, it is recommended to draw a
coordinate axis in the position for photographing based on the direction pointed out by
the compass, mark the direction in which the photographing is done, and take pictures
in the specified direction, but the position for photographing is allowed not to be any
point on the coordinate axis.
Upon photographing the environment of a site, it is recommended that you lean against
the parapet wall when the floor is too large, to avoid the sheltering of the floor; when
the floor is small, it is recommended to take pictures at the highest point of the building
under the pre-condition of ensured safety; when there is an iron tower, it is required to
ensure the photographing point is over 10 m higher than the surrounding environment.
Upon photographing the floor, it is required to include an area of more than 90% of the
whole floor, and the approximate position of the planned antenna must be included in
the picture. If the position of co-site G-network antenna and cabling rack must also be
102 102 102 102
in the picture. To meet the requirements, multiple pictures can be taken, and it should
be noted in the name that the part of the roof that the picture shows.
The picture of the equipment room should be taken at the door; in the picture of the
appearance of a building in the site to be selected, the whole building should be taken
into picture.
There should be no survey personnel or customer personnel in the pictures taken.
After taking pictures for each site, you should review all the pictures of the site with
your camera with LCD, to ensure they have been correctly taken; you should take
pictures with doubled care due to no review function available to the ZIGUANG
camera. Youd better import the pictures into your PC and check it immediately after
taking the pictures of a site; for those pictures that have not been properly taken, you
should do it again.
Caution:
You should use the exposure compensation function of the camera with great care. If it
is dark or bright, you should review your pictures at once.
In the darkness, you can adjust the sharpness of your camera.
5.3.2.4 Contents of Photographing
1. Eight pictures for the ambient environment, starting from the right north, each
picture taken in the angle of 45
o

2. Multiple pictures of ceiling, taken separately based on the size of the roof.
3. One picture for the appearance of a building in the site to be selected.
5.3.2.5 Naming Rule
The pictures should be named as ruled below:
XX (Name of a service area or name of a city/county) XX (site name) North (or
northeast, east, east of the roof)
5.4 Compass Use Specifications
5.4.1 Structure of a Compass
Generally, a compass is housed in a round box. It comprises two parts, one for the
103 103 103 103
compass on which there are a pointer and a dial, and the other part is a scale and an
idler wheel.
The appearance of the compass is shown in the figure below:

Fig. 5.4-1 Appearance of a Compass
5.4.2 Basic Operations
5.4.2.1 Determining the North Pointer in a Compass
Open a compass and place it flatly. The zero line of the compass must be in line with
the pointer with a dot, as shown in the red circle 1 in Figure 1, and the pointer must
direct to north (Magnetic North).
Note: Some compasses have their white needle pointing to north while some others
have their black needle pointing to north. The end of the pointer with a dot should be
the reference.
5.4.2.2 Determining the Direction Angle of the Sector Antenna
In the first place, you should determine the orientation of the sector, and point the north
direction on the compass dial to the determined direction. In this case, the read of the
pointer directing to North is the direction angle of the antenna. as shown in the Fig.
5.4-2:
Antenna
North
Zero
line
Antenna
Azimuth
South

Fig. 5.4-2 Direction angle of the Antenna
104 104 104 104
5.4.2.3 Measuring the Direction Angle of the Installed Antenna
Way 1: Similar to the above. Use the zero line of the compass dial to aim at the central
axis of the back(or front) plane of the antenna. Apply the central axis of the antenna to
make the notch (as shown in red circle 1 in Figure 1) of the compass coincide with its
notch (as shown in red circle 2 in Figure 1), to ensure that the pointer is vertical to the
plane of the antenna. The read of the north pointer is the direction angle of the antenna.
If aiming at the central axis of the back(or front) plane of the antenna, 180
o
should be
reduced to get the direction angle of antenna. as shown in Fig. 5.4-3:
entral axle line
of antenna
Zero
line
North
Inclination
between the
central axle line
of the antenna
and the north
direction
South

Fig. 5.4-3 Measurement of Antenna Azimuth
Way 2: To measure or locate the azimuth of the antenna, you can measure the azimuth
of the base line of the antenna back plane, and there is only a difference of 90
o
between
both of them, in this way, the inconvenience in some special cases can be avoided.
Suppose a person faces the right front of an antenna, he can measure the azimuth to the
left of the base line of the antenna back plane, so the antenna azimuth equals the
azimuth of the base line of the antenna back plane plus or minus 90
o
.
Here is the description with the azimuth to the left of the base line of the antenna back
plane, as shown in Fig. 5.4-4. Then, the north seeking degree, A, read by the compass
is the azimuth of left direction for the base line of the antenna back plane, and the
antenna azimuth is A minus 90
o
. Keep the zero line of the compass consistent with the
base line of the antenna back plane (opposite direction is also allowed, but the formula
should depend upon actual situations.)
105 105 105 105
North
degree
South
Zero
line
Baseline of
antenna
back plane
The pointed
direction of
antenna
Left direction
of the baseline
of the antenna
back plane
North
degree
South
Zero
line

Fig. 5.4-4 Measurement of Antenna Azimuth
5.4.2.4 Measuring the Downtilt Angle of the Installed Antenna
Open the compass, place its straight side on the back plane of the installed antenna, and
adjust the gradienter with the manipulator behind the compass until the gradienter is in
the level status. In this case, the scale degree (internal dial) indicated by the white dot
beside the gradienter is the downtilt angle of the antenna.
5.4.3 Precautions
Do not use a compass around the strong magnetic field, and do not put a compass on a
metal platform (including an iron tower) or near a metal target, because these factors
may affect the positioning precision of the compass.

107 107 107 107
6 The Propagation model test and
correction
6.1 Propagation Model Test Operation Process
Follow this process during a propagation model test:
Start the test
Formulate working plan
for propagation model test
Group leader
Submit data and export
testing reports
Group leader
Prepare and check
testing equipment
Coordinator and testing
personnel
Exploration and
selection of testing sites
Explorationing engineer
Preparation of testing
environment, data
collection and processing
Testing engineer
Selection and
preparation of testing
routes
Explorationing engineer
Client
affirmance
Data accords with
revision requirements
Test finishes
Propose communication
for exact requirements
Coordinator
Output: A Plan of Propagation
Model Test in XX Service Area
Output: Exploration Report of
Propagation Model in XX Service
Area
Output: Route Selection Report of
Propagation Model in XX Service
Area
Input: Exploration Report of Propagation Model in XX
Service Area and the Route Selection Report of
Propagation Model in XX Service Area; Output: testing
data of propagation model in XX service area
Output: Plan of Propagation Model Test in XX
Service Areathe Exploration Report of
Propagation Model in XX Service Area, the
Route Selection Report of Propagation Model in
XX Service Area and the testing data of
propagation model in XX service area
N
N

108 108 108 108
6.2 Test Procedures
This section introduces specific procedures and main working operations for
implementing a propagation model test.
6.2.1 Equipment Preparation
Equipment mentioned in the following table should be prepared for this test:
Name Quantity Description
Pilot transmitter 1 Transmit frequency and power-adjustable pilot signals
Line tester 1 Include receiving antenna, data line, GPS antenna and hardware dongle
Lap-top 11 Installed test software, storage battery and power cable
Vehicle mounted power supply 1 Include cigarette lighter connection line, inverter and power connector board
Tripod 1 Fixed antenna
Omni antenna 1 Propagate pilot signals with the frequency band corresponding to the
transmitter
Feeder and jumper 1 Connect pilot transmitter and antenna with connectors protected well
Power cable unit 1 Used for providing power supply for the pilot transmitter, including
connectors and connector board with its length more than 50m
Site exploration equipment 1 Explore the testing site, including digital cameras, compass, ranging tester or
elevation tester, GPS, rechargeable batteries and chargers
Map 1 Marked with detailed routes
Adjustable wrench 2 Fasten the antenna
Rope 1 Longer than 30m
Common tools 1
Include pincers, screwdrivers (both cross and straight), glove, socket
conversion connector and tape
Remarks: Being expensive, precious and easy to be damaged, the pilot transmitter and
line tester are expected to be carried by testing personnel their own instead of being
transported because of too much luggage for out-site tests.
6.2.2 Testing Site Selection
6.2.2.1 Selection Procedures
1. Testing area confirmation
Areas within the planned region or required by the client are expected.
2. Testing area division
First, divide the testing area into three parts based on their terrain features: Open
lawn, hill and mountainous region. Second step is to divide it according to its
109 109 109 109
environment into large and dense city, medium-sized city, town and village.
At last according to proportions of various field features, it can be further
divided into: Dense city, usual city, countryside and village.
3. Primary decision
Remark the testing sites on the map.
4. Site exploration
Explore the expected testing sites and record their environment features.
5. Site selection
According to the records, find out the testing site that meets requirements based
on the site selection principles.
6. Selection report export
According to the site information, export a report based on the requirements
mentioned on the Template of Propagation Model Testing Site Exploration
Report in XX Service Area.
6.2.2.2 Site Selection Principles
1. No obvious obstacles exist around the site.
2. The antenna position in the site should have the same height as that installed for
the model in this site. The site should be a little higher than buildings around.
The antenna installed in testing sites in dense cities and areas should be 10m
higher than average buildings around, the antenna in usual cities 15m higher,
and the antenna in countryside or village 15m to 25m higher.
3. Select two to four testing sites in further divided testing area and eliminate
possible position influence using testing data get from several sites after data
combination and model adjustment. In this case, terrain environment of the
representative model to be adjusted should be consistent with that of other
testing sites. At least four sites should be taken as testing sites in dense cities and
areas, at least three in usual cities, two in courtsides, and 1 in villages.
4. A model token can be used instead of propagation model in some small cities
without dividing them into dense, usual areas and countryside. Therefore, a
representative site in the center of the city can be selected for testing. As for
110 110 110 110
medium-sized cities, two tokens can be considered, dense area and countryside,
and two representative sites are expected for testing.
5. In some offices in small cities but dense areas, the client may require a certain
number of sites to be taken for a test, for example 3 sites with each being
completely tested. However possibly only one site is enough in the whole city
for the test. In such a case, the 3 sites can have repeated routes but cannot be
divided into different areas with different routes, thus avoiding inadequate site
data and poor propagation model get from data combination and model
adjustment.
6. There should be various field features around testing sites and enough roads to
reach there.
7. The building of the testing site should be of middle size to avoid adding antenna
height and influencing transmission of testing signals caused by walls,
especially parapet walls.
6.2.2.3 Site Environment Information Records
1. Measure with GPS the attitude/latitude of the testing site and places installing
the testing antenna for sites with large-scale floor. The attitude/latitude data
should be in decimal notation accurate to 5 decimal digits.
2. Measure height of the testing antenna (relative height from the middle part of
the antenna to the ground), using the ranging tester or elevation tester.
3. Take pictures in the following eight directions: North, north east, south ease,
south, south west, west, and north west with a digital camera and a compass.
4. Take a picture of the floor with the testing antenna.
5. Name all the pictures with the same module as XX (service area) XX (site name)
XX (direction or position, such as north or floor).
6. Give descriptions about features around. When there are obstacles around,
height of the obstacle and distance between it and the antenna should be
included in the description.
7. According to the site information, export a report based on the requirements
mentioned on the Template of Propagation Model Testing Site Exploration
Report in XX Service Area, referring to Appendix B.
111 111 111 111
6.2.3 Testing Route Selection
6.2.3.1 Selection Procedure
1. Get a general knowledge about the geography environment.
First, you need to have a general knowledge about the geography environment
by buying a detailed map with main roads marked on or getting related
geography and humanistic knowledge with the help of local residents.
2. Work out the testing routes
Work out the testing routes according to route selection principles and terrain
and roads around the testing site. An on-site review of the testing route is
recommended before implementing the test.
3. Make a chart of the testing route
Mark the material routes on the map with a pen or on the electronic map and
print it out.
If possible, you can add the map in the Agilent ranging tester software to carry
out real time supervision. Refer to the Appendix E for the usage of the software
mentioned.
4. Export route selection report
Export a report based on the requirements mentioned on the Template of
Propagation Model Testing Site Rout Selection Report in XX Service Area.
6.2.3.2 Route Selection Principles
1. The following routes should be considered: Routs in four directions with
different distances, all the available routes within various field features, main
routes and alleys with the width less than 3m.
2. A route shall not be tested repeatedly. The first data can be used. In case of
parking (due to red light for example), no data should be recorded (pause the
testing software in case a software is used).
3. The testing radius should be as large as possible to ensure the weakest signals to
be received by the receiver under 120dBm. Adjust the testing routes according
to the signal receiving condition. However for some medium-sized cities, you do
not need to go further to distant village even if the signal at the edge of the city
112 112 112 112
is above 120dBm.
4. The vehicle shall move at the moderate speed slower than 40km/h in the test.
5. Routes with lakes and rivers if there are lakes and rivers in the city shall be
avoided.
6. In case of a hill in the city, you can check signals at the hill back to get
diffractive factors based on signal attenuation. Attention: Do not check signals
of the hill at the same side as the base station. In such a case, signals will be
stronger with height increase because that there are fewer obstacles in high
places. Thus, the curve get in this situation will show that farther distance leads
in better signals. If the model is adjusted according to such a curve, the standard
offset will increase.
7. Recommended route selection methods: First check the west-east direction and
then the south-north one to work out a route network as shown in Fig. 6.2-1 and
Fig. 6.2-2, Fig. 6.2-3 shows the exact route map.
start
end

Fig. 6.2-1 Route map 1
113 113 113 113

Fig. 6.2-2 Route map 2

Fig. 6.2-3 Actual route map
8. Sampling routes shall be checked: Sampling routes should be equally distributed
in four directions and surround the testing site as the axis. Two to three sets, at
least two sets, of sampling data should be carried out in each direction, avoiding
too many or too few sampling routes in a direction.
9. As for test of sites with a great testing distance, it is difficult to cover all the
areas. Therefore, you can implement the test in areas under the expected to be
covered direction until receiving signals under -120dBm. If possible, you can
choose a parallel route to return so as to get two sets of sampling data for
114 114 114 114
super-distant model research.
6.2.4 Test Environment Preparations
When conducting the propagation model test, test environment is composed of
equipment like radiation, receiver, antenna, as shown in the following figure:

Lap-top
background

Transmitter
Receiver
(UE)
Antenna

6.2.4.1 Preparations at Transmission End
1. The omni-antenna is mounted on the roof or a building or a tower. Make sure
that the test point in the first Fresnel zone set up with the antenna should be of
no obstacles. When installing the omni-antenna at the top of the building, the
position of the antenna should be as close to the building edge as possible,
avoiding that the wave radiation may be hindered by the edge of the building in
all directions. If the antenna has to be installed away from the edge of the
building, it must be installed high above the building floor. If it is installed on
the tower, it must be 1 meter higher than the highest point of the tower to avoid
the effect to the signals transmission from the tower itself.
2. The antenna and the transmitter must be connected with jumper connectors
tightly (make sure that fastened nuts cannot be screwed by hand), and any part
of the jumpers should not be twined. In rainy days, feeder heads must be
water-proof. Protect the connectors with a protective cap after using the feeder
cable and the antenna to avoid damage from tossing on the way.
3. Check before the startup of the pilot transmitter if ports of antenna are connected
well with the antenna or if it is big loaded (more than 50W), otherwise amplifier
115 115 115 115
will alarm or be damaged because of the self-activation caused by mismatch.
4. After the startup, check whether the fan begins to work at the back of the
machine; if it fails to start working after long time, there will be a temperature
alarm caused by excessively high temperature (over 70).
5. Connect the pilot transmitter with the background of the lap-top by the network
cable. Startup the background of the pilot transmitter on the lap-top.
6. The pilot transmitter is connected with 220 V AC power supply or 24V DC
power supply, Switch to the connected power supply and the system powers on.
Alarm indication on the background interface of the transmitter and the LED
turn from red to green. It shows that it has been connected with the background
and the machine starts to work, as shown in the following figure:

7. The frequency of the pilot transmitter must be configured close to the frequency
in the real system. A clean frequency can be selected through the receiver. In the
selection of Frequency Configuration, input the needed frequency and click
Frequency to make it work.
8. Set the attenuation to adjust the output transmitting power of the pilot transmitter.
In the selection of Frequency Configuration, input the needed frequency and
click to enable it. When the attenuation is set as 0dB, the maximum output
power of the pilot transmitter is 40dBm (10 W); when the attenuation is set as
7dB, the output power of it is 33dBm (2W).When conducting a propagation
116 116 116 116
model test, usually the output power of transmission is set as 10 W.

Frequency
Configuration

Attenuation
Configuration

9. You should record data such as transmission power, frequency and antenna gain
in the following table as carrying out a test.
Parameter Value
Scramble
Testing frequency
Transmission power of pilot channels
Antenna manufacturer and model
Antenna main gain
Antenna working frequency range
Antenna height
6.2.4.2 Preparations at Receiving End and Data Record
1) 1. Set the receiving antenna of the receiver and GPS antenna on the middle part of
the top of the car.
2) 2. Connect the lap-top and the receiver with the data line (COM1 interface of usual
lap-top for connection the data line), connect the antenna of the receiver and GPS
antenna with the receiver, provide power supply to the lap-top and receiver using a
cigarette lighter and inverter. Storage batteries and UPS can also be used for power
supply, referring to the Appendix D for usage attention of storage batteries.
117 117 117 117

3. Start the Agilent E6474A software, open System Setup from File > New, and
right click the COM port connected with the receiver, in usual case the receiver
and the COM1 port of the lap-top are connected through a data line. Select
Manual Refresh from the pop-up menu and Agilent Receiver in the Equipment
List. Then you need to wait for about two to three minutes for the software to
identify the receiver.
Equipment
configuration
Right click Com Port to search the equipment

118 118 118 118
A dialog box will pop up after the software finds a receiver. Click Yes for
acknowledgement. You can click Detail to view the detailed information of the
hardware equipment at the COM port where E6455C stands for the receiver and
TSIP Navigator for GPS equipment in the receiver.

3. Make sure that you select the TSIP Navigator because it is not selected by
default after the software identifies the receiver, so you need to select it.

4. Edit equipment properties. Select the receiver, E6544C, and right click it to enter
the Properties page. Add the items to be tested in the Choose Measurement
tabbed page: CW/Channel Power and W-CDMA/UMTS Scrambling Code
Analyzer. You can carry out the frequency cleansing test before the normal test
using the Spectrum Analyzer, referring to the Appendix G.
119 119 119 119

Set the Measurement Type to Channel Power List in the CW/Channel Power
page.

Set other parameters as shown in the figure.
In the W-CDMA/UMTS Scrambling Code Analyzer page, select User List as
the measurement mode and carrier wave frequency as the testing frequency of
the propagation model. Add pilot signals scramble in the User List, which is
fixed to 400 in usual pilot transmitter. Set Timeslots to 5 (you can set it to 5 first
and then deselect Primary SCH Scan and Top N in the Measurement Type).
Set the sampling interval mode to Time (0s).
120 120 120 120

5. Select File > Save As after searching and configuring the equipment to save the
configuration files in *.spf format. In this way this configuration file can be
opened directly without reconfiguration for the next test.
6. Data recording. Click the yellow button on the toolbar to enter the real-time
display mode where no data record is implemented. Click the green button to
enter the file dialog box, and enter the data position and file name to record the
data. In case of parking during a test, click the Pause key on the toolbar to pause
data recording. Click Stop key on the toolbar to finish data recording and save
the data file after a test ends.
121 121 121 121
Pause the test
Data collection mode
Real-time display mode
Stop sampling

6.2.5 Test Result Processing
6.2.5.1 Test Database Exporting
1. Click Tools > Export Wizard on the menu and select the test data files to be
exported (in the format of *.sd5).

2. To create a new template for export. Select New export plan. Click Next to get
122 122 122 122
the dialog of Select Columns for Export and Select Position (Longitude and
Latitude) in Optional Columns checkbox.

On the left of the dialog, select Receiver > W-CDMA Scrambling Code List >
SC Agg Ec and add to the right column. For the post model correction,
exporting in the Selected Columns needs to be in the order of Longitude,
Latitude and SC Agg Ec.

3. Click Next, there is the Define Selected Column Properties dialog box.
123 123 123 123

4. As the prompt in the menu, find the page shown below and select SC Agg Ec in
the dropdown.

5. Select Apply Binning and click Next.
124 124 124 124

6. Configure the parameter as shown in the following figure (Bin as 6m)

7. Click Next. The Define Export dialog box pops up. Select Tab-Delimited in
Output File and Signed Decimal Degrees in Lat/Lon.
125 125 125 125

8. Click Next. Click Save to save the template to export for later use. Select the
device from which the data will be exported as shown in the following figure
(tick in the checkbox)

9. Click Export to Files and input the names of the data for export (generally
including the names of the test site and the test time). The format of the exported
file is as shown in the follow figure (after combination):
126 126 126 126

6.2.5.2 On-site data test
After the test of the propagation model, for the validity and effectiveness of the
preliminary on-site data testing, to avoid being not ideal when turn in the test data to
the staff who do the correction, to avoid the waste of the labor and materials causing
the affects upon the overall quality of the plan and design, the test staff need verify the
test data on site with the data testing tools to see if it needs to be re-test.
6.2.5.3 Export of the test report
After the test, export the test report according to the Report Template for the
Propagation Model Test. After exporting the .txt files, the original .sd5 data files,
propagation model test report, test site information and photos of the surroundings,
routing of the test site, turn them in to the emulation team to make corrections to the
propagation model.
6.3 WCDMA Propagation model tuning
Propagation model tuning plays a very important role in network planning. Its accuracy
directly affects the wireless network planning scale, coverage prediction accuracy, and
base station (BS) deployment. This document describes how to make operations such
as data filtering based on effective data provided by test personnel to make an
acceptable propagation model.
6.3.1 Inputs for Propagation model tuning
The following are input parameters for propagation model tuning:
127 127 127 127
Test data
The foundation of propagation model tuning is the multitude of effective test data,
related parameters of the transmit and receive systems, and test photos and problem
description materials. For detailed test data needed for propagation model tuning, refer
to the test data part of the propagation model tuning test specifications.
Electronic map
The electronic map, also called digital map, describes the geographical information of
the area in a digital form. It is a necessity for propagation model tuning. It has two key
parameters: earth model and projection mode. In the mobile communication field, the
most used electronic map format is Planet/EET (proposed by MSI/ ERICSSON), which
supports information included in electronic maps of various earth models and
projection modes. The electronic map covers geographical information such as
hypsography, height, clutters, vectors, and buildings that affect propagation of electric
waves. These are all important basic data for propagation model tuning.
Accuracy of the electronic map depends on the propagation model, the planning
precision, and application environment. Generally, it is of 5 m precision for micro
cellular environments in densely populated cities, 20 m for general cities, 50 m for
suburbs, and 100 m for rural areas. To use an electronic map, you also need to learn its
update time.
Propagation model tuning Software
Propagation model tuning is an important part of network planning. Generally, all
network planning software, including AIRCOM and PLANET, can adjust the
propagation model. Now, we use AIRCOM.
6.3.2 WCDMA Propagation model tuning Process
Fig. 6.3-1 is the flow chart of propagation model tuning.
128 128 128 128

Fig. 6.3-1 WCDMA Propagation model tuning Flow Chart
The following describes each link in the flow chart.
6.3.3 Preprocessing Test Data
6.3.3.1 Filtering Test Data
A multitude of effective test data are the foundation of propagation model tuning.
129 129 129 129
Therefore, it is a must to filter the test data submitted by test personnel and use really
effective test data that reflect propagation characteristics to adjust the propagation
model to make the model well reflect the signals of the covered area. The following
data should be filtered out:
1. Data of remote points
When the receiver is distant away from the transmitter, the signal received is too
weak and thus usually the measured value is inaccurate because of the receiver
sensitivity. In addition, for the CW test signal the back noise accounts for a
higher proportion in signals received at remote ends, posing another
disadvantage for model tuning. For these reasons, data of remote test points
must be removed. For pilot frequencies, points whose CPICH Ec/Io is less than
-15 dB or whose CPICH Ec is less than 110 dBm must be removed. For CW
signals, points whose Io is less than 95 dBm must be removed. The specific
remote threshold value depends on the coverage. When calibrating a macro
model, a distance filter must be used.
2. Data of close points
As the power of signals near the BS is mainly affected by buildings and streets
near the BS because of influence of the antenna height pattern, test data of
points near the BS cannot be used to adjust the propagation model. When
calibrating a macro model, a distance filter must be used.
C.Y.Lee believes that when d<=4h1h2/(where, h1 and h2 are heights of the BS
antenna and the mobile station (MS) antenna and is the wavelength), it is close
distance. For example, if h1=30m, h2=1.5m, and f=2140 MHz, all points whose
d is less than 1284 m.
You can use filters in the network planning software to filter test data of remote
and close points.
3. Waveguide effects (or street effects)
An electric wave propagation test is generally conducted on a street. For a street,
there are waveguide effects: when the propagation direction of the electric
wave from the signal source has a small angle with the street direction of the test
point, the signal received will be significantly stronger than usual and make the
signal in parallel with the propagation direction about 10 dB stronger than that
vertical with the propagation direction.
130 130 130 130
As the purpose of a propagation model is not just to predict path loss but to
reflect the propagation condition of the whole covered area, waveguide effects
and other road-related factors must be removed. Otherwise, the adjusted
propagation model may be too big or small at large.
4. Other data points that are obviously abnormal
6.3.3.2 Adjusting Test Data
1. Adjusting GPS data
As there is something inaccurate with the GPS positioning, longitudinal and
latitudinal information of the test data must be adjusted to eliminate
geographical difference and thus make the test data full agree with the test route.
2. Merging test data
For a typical artificial environment, generally the test is conducted at more than
one test point. To make full use of the great deal of effective data got from the
multi-point test, test data of different sites must be effective merged. However,
because of differences between different sites (mainly because of the different
antenna effective heights), in the merger data of different sites must be adjusted
based on a certain reference. This processing only applies to propagation model
tuning through curve fitting. For the specific process, see the section about
propagation model tuning methods.
6.3.3.3 Selecting Data for Propagation Model Tuning
If the CW transmitter is used, use the broadband gross power collected by the received,
RSSI (Io) to adjust the propagation model. If the transmitter is a pilot frequency one,
you can use CPICH Ec, CPICH Ag.Ec, or RSSI (Io) to adjust the propagation model.
The following describes the advantages and disadvantages of these three kinds of data.
CPICH Ag.Ec is the result of rake combination of power of all paths after the effects of
multiple paths on received signal are considered. CPICH Ec is the power value of a
single path of the multiple paths. As the WCDMA system adopts the rake receiver
technology, CPICH Ag.Ec is more suitable for propagation model tuning than CPICH
Ec.
RSSI (Io) is the power of the whole receiving bandwidth. It consists of interference
signals and back noise as well as useful signals. If the test environment is unclean, the
131 131 131 131
proportion of interference in RSSI will increase and thus RSSI cannot effectively
reflect the strength of useful signals received. However, when the frequency is well
cleaned, appropriate equilibration can effectively eliminate the effect of fast fading
because RSSI (Io) has a high collection rate. Compared with RSSI, the CPICH Ag.Ec
received by the receiver is pure useful signals. Although using it to adjust the model
can accurately calculate out the propagation loss, due to the data collection and
software processing rates it cannot effective filter out effects of fast fading. Therefore,
it is better to use RSSI (Io) to adjust the model when the test environment is clean and
to use CPICH Ag.Ec if the vehicle advances at a slow speed or there is only small fast
fading with the signal.
6.3.3.4 Format of Model Tuning Data File
Data used in propagation model tuning are only the longitudinal and latitudinal
information got in drive test and the signal strength of the data items selected. There
are two data files used in propagation model tuning, file header *.hd and file body *.dat.
Their formats are as follows:
PHO1.hd PHO1.dat

The file header records the BS information and test information of the propagation
model test, including the test data file body used, longitude and latitude of the BS,
antenna height, obliquity, deflection, antenna type, BS equivalent launched power EiRP,
feeder type, length, loss, and transmit frequency. The file body includes test data, that
is, the longitude, latitude, and signal strength. Its first column records the longitude,
second column the latitude, and the third the signal strength, with different columns
separated with a tab.
6.3.4 Selecting Propagation model
For 800 MHz electric waves, a frequently used model is Hata, which is got through
formula fitting based on Okumura test data.
As using the Okumura model involves finding its various curves, this model is not
suitable for computer prediction. Based on the mid-value signal strength prediction
curve of Okumura and through curve fitting, Hata proposed an empirical formula for
propagation loss, the Okumura-Hata model.
132 132 132 132
For simplification purpose, Hata made the following three hypotheses for the model:
1) The model is based on propagation loss between two omni antennae.
2) The terrain is flat rather than irregular.
3) Use the propagation loss formula for urban areas. For other areas, adjust the data
with a tuning formula.
Applicable conditions:
f is 1501500 MHz.
b
h
, effective height of the BS antenna, is 30200 m.
m
h
, height of the MS antenna, is 110 m.
The communication distance is 135 km.
The propagation loss formula is as follows:
) )(lg lg 55 . 6 9 . 44 ( ) ( lg 82 . 13 lg 16 . 26 55 . 69 d h h a h f L
b m b bCity
+ + =
Description of the formula:
The unit of d is km and that of f is MHz.
bCity
L is the mid-value of basic propagation loss in urban areas.
h
b
, and h
m
are effective heights of the BS and MS antennae. They are counted in
m.
The effective height of the BS antenna is calculated as follows: Suppose that
the BS antenna is
s
h from the floor, the altitude of the BS floor is
g
h , the
MS antenna is
m
h from the floor and the altitude of the MS is
mg
h , then the
effective height of the BS antenna, h
b
, is the value of (
s
h +
g
h -
mg
h ) and that of
the MS antenna is
m
h .
(Note: There is many a method to calculate the effective height of the BS
antenna, for example, the average of the floor altitudes within 5 to 10 km from
the BS and the landform fit curve of the floor altitudes within 5 to 10 km from
the BS. The calculation method depends on the propagation model used and the
calculation precision required.
MS antenna height tuning factor:
133 133 133 133
=
< <
< <

=
m h
MHz f h
MHz f h
f h f
h a
m
m
m
m
m
5 . 1 0
city Large
1500 400 97 . 4 ) 75 . 11 (lg 2 . 3
200 150 1 . 1 ) 54 . 1 (lg 29 . 8
city size - small or - Medium ) 8 . 0 lg 56 . 1 ( ) 7 . 0 lg 1 . 1 (
) (
2
2

Long-haul propagation tuning factor:
> + + +
=
20 )
20
)(lg 10 07 . 1 10 87 . 1 14 . 0 ( 1
20 1
8 . 0 3 4
d
d
h f
d
b

Tuning factors:
street
K street tuning factor
Generally, only the tuning curve of losses in parallel with or vertical to the propagation
direction is given. For convenience of calculation, the following gives the fit formula
for arbitrary angles.
Assume that the angle between the propagation direction and the street is , then:
< +
+
=
1 ) cos 6 . 7 sin 9 . 5 (
1 cos ) lg
6
10
6 . 7 ( sin ) lg
6
11
9 . 5 (
d
d d d
K
street

As generally the street effect disappears beyond 810 km, you only need to consider
the street effect of within 10 km.
K
mr
suburb tuning factor
) 4 . 5 )) 28 / (lg( 2 (
2
+ = f K
mr

Q
o
open area tuning factor
) 94 . 40 lg 33 . 18 ] [lg 78 . 4 (
2
+ = f f Q
o

Q
r
quasi-open area tuning factor
5 . 5
0
+ = Q Q
r

u
R rural area tuning factor
17 . 23 lg 17 . 9 ) (lg 39 . 2 )
28
(lg
2 2
+ = f f
f
R
u

K
h
upland area tuning factor
134 134 134 134
+ + +
> + +
<
=
1 , 15 ) 2 . 7 ) lg 96 . 6 024 . 0 7 . 5 (
1 , 15 ) 2 . 7 lg 5 . 9 ( ) lg 96 . 6 024 . 0 7 . 5 (
15 0
1
1 1
h h h h
h h h h h
h
K
h

hland undulation height, as shown in the following figure. It is the difference
between 10% and 90% of the undulation height of the area 10 km from the MS toward
the BS (if the area is less than 10 km, use the actual distance). This method applies to
the condition that the land undulates multiple times (>3).
h
10%
90%

1
h =
mg
h -h/8-
min
h .
min
h . It is the minimum height of the calculation section h.
K
sp
slope tuning factor

1)
2)
3)
Base station
h
1

h
2

H
+
m

d
3

d
2

d
Mobile station
d
2

d
1

(a) Positive slope+
m

d
1

h
1

H
1) 2)
3)
d
2
d
3

d
h
2

(b) Negative slope-
m

-
m

A slope landform may produce secondary floor reflections. When d2>d1, both the
positive and negative slopes shown in the figure may produce secondary reflections.
135 135 135 135
The slope tuning factor can be roughly calculated as follows:
m m m sp
d d K 44 . 0 002 . 0 008 . 0
2
+ =
m
is calculated in mini radian and d in km.
m
is the mean obliquity of 1 km before and after the MS at the section on the straight
line between the MS and the BS got through least square.
K
im
isolated hill tuning factor
This factor is calculated using shade diffraction. This calculation method involve a big
volume of calculation work but is accurate.
The following figure shows this method:
hp
h1
r1
r2

First, calculate out the four parameters of each single shade, that is,
1
r ,
2
r ,
p
h , and
working wavelength .
Use these four parameters to calculate parameter v:
)
1 1
(
2
2 1
r r
h v
p
+ =

Calculate the diffraction loss:
<=
> + + +
=
7 . 0 0
7 . 0 ) 1 . 0 1 ) 1 . 0 ( lg( 20 9 . 6
2
v
v v v
K
im

K
s
Sea (lake) mixed path tuning factor
When the propagation path involves an water area, there are two different situations to
consider, as shown in the following figure:
Base station
Mobile station
d
s

d
Base station
Mobile station
d
d
s

(a) Base station near land (b) Base station near waters

136 136 136 136
Define the tuning factor to:
+
+
=
) 6 . 9 48 . 0 ( : ) (
) 81 . 0 68 . 0 / 0 . 7 ( : ) (
2
2
q qd b
d q q q a
K
ts

Where, q = d
s
/ d (%);
s
d is the length of the whole water body in the section.
Method of judging to use formula (a) or (b):
If on the section between the BS and the MS, there is a water body within 200 m to the
BS, use:
2 / )) ( ) ( ( b K a K K
s
+ =
Otherwise, ) (b K K
s
= .
S( )Building density tuning factor

< + +
<
=
1 20
5 1 ) 20 lg 19 . 0 ) (lg 6 . 15 (
100 5 ) lg 25 30 (
) (
2
a
a a a
a a
a s

abuilding density, calculated in percentage.
Combination usage of tuning factors
Overall path loss:
+ +
+ + + =
r
mr
u
sp
im
h
s
street b
Q
Q
K
R
K
K
K
K
a S K L L
0
0
0
) (
EET tuning factors
ERICSSON used a new set of tuning factor calculation methods in its EET software.
The following describes these factors:
street
K street tuning factor
Same as in the Okumura-Hata model.
K
mr
suburb tuning factor
137 137 137 137
Q
o
open area tuning factor
Q
r
quasi open area tuning factor
u
R rural area tuning factor
K
h
upland area tuning factor
+ +
<
= 20 ) 105 . 3 lg 538 . 3 ) (lg 18 . 5 (
20 0
2
h K h h
h
K
hf h

<
>
+
=
10 0
10 ) 2 / ( )
2
/( ) 727 . 10 lg 0544 . 14 ) (lg 419 . 1 (
2
h
h h h
h
h h
K
hf

The definition of h is the same as in the Okumura-Hata model and h is the height of
the MS compared with where h =0.
K
sp
slope tuning factor
C B A K
m m sp
+ =
2

m
is the mean obliquity of 25 km before and after the MS at the section on the line
between the MS and the BS got through least square. Its unit is mini radian.
Parameters A, B, and C valuate to as follows:
D(km) A B C
>60 -0.009411 0.7620 0.22
=30 -0.013400 0.6313 -0.63
<10 -0.002394 0.2057 0.12
If the value of d does not belong to the ranges listed in this table, you can calculate out
the values of A, B, and C through the linear interpolation method.
K
im
138 138 138 138
) ( 07 . 0
2
2
2
3
2
4
2
E Dd Cd Bd Ad h K
im
+ + + + =
hheight of the hill
d
1
distance from the BS to the peak of the hill.
d
1
distance from the MS to the peak of the hill.
d
1
(km) A B C D E
>60 0.8492 -1.677 11.47 -30.41 19.45
=30 0.6259 -1.280 9.184 -25.19 9.790
<15 0.0498 -1.065 8.102 -23.33 4.070
For other d
1
values, you can calculate out the values of A, B, C, D, and E through linear
interpolation.
K
s
sea (lake) mixed path tuning factor
When the propagation path involves an water area, there are two different situations to
consider, as shown in the following figure:
Base station
Mobile station
d
s

d
Base station
Mobile station
d
d
s

(a) Base station near land (b) Base station near waters

Tuning factor:
+ +
+
=
) 06 . 0 1868 . 0 000789 . 0 ( : ) (
) 09 . 0 06893 . 0 000579 . 0 ( : ) (
2
2
q q b
q q a
K
ts

q = d
s
/ d (%).
s
d is the length of all the water body on the section.
The method of judging which of formulae (a) and (b) to be used is the same as in the
Okumura-Hata model.
S( )building density tuning factor

<
<
=
1 20
5 1 ) lg 74 . 3 ) (lg 75 . 9 20 (
100 5 ) lg 0 . 19 26 (
) (
2
a
a a a
a a
a s
abuilding density, counted in %.
139 139 139 139
BS antenna effective height additional tuning factor H
t

C h B h A H
be be t
+ + = lg ) (lg
2

h
be
effective height of the BS antenna:
ga b g be
h h h h + = ) ( .
h
g
floor level of the BS.
h
b
height of the BS antenna.
h
ga
mean altitude between the MS and the BS.
d(km) A B C
1 0.5131 11.68 -23.32
3 0.2433 14.42 -27.31
5 0.3690 15.60 -29.94
10 0.5457 17.75 -34.66
20 2.568 11.89 -30.61
40 4.289 7.019 -27.66
For other d values, you can calculate out the values of A, B, and C through linear
interpolation.
MS antenna effective height additional tuning factor H
t

] 9 . 1 ) (lg 16 . 10 ) (lg 27 . 10 ) (lg 92 . 22 [
2 3
+ =
m m m r
h h h H
Combination usage of tuning factors
r t
r
mr
u
sp
im
h
s
street b
H H
Q
Q
K
R
K
K
K
K
a S K L L + +
+ +
+ + + =
0
0
0
) (
COST-231 model
For 1800 MHz, use the COST-231 model.
GSM900/1800
b
h
140 140 140 140
m
h
The communication distance is 135 km.
) )(lg lg 55 . 6 9 . 44 ( ) ( lg 82 . 13 lg 9 . 33 3 . 46 d h h a h f L
b m b bCity
+ + =
The unit of d is km and that of f is MHz.
bCity
L is the mid-value of basic propagation loss in urban areas.
h
b
, h
m
effective heights of the BS and MS antennae, counted in m.
The effective height of the BS antenna is calculated as follows: Suppose that the BS
antenna is
s
h away from the floor, the altitude of the BS floor is
g
h , the MS antenna
is
m
h from the floor and the altitude of the MS floor is
mg
h , then the effective height
of the BS antenna, h
b
, is the value of (
s
h +
g
h -
mg
h ) and that of the MS antenna is
m
h .
Tuning factor of the MS antenna:
=
< <
< <

=
m h
MHz f h
MHz f h
f h f
h a
m
m
m
m
m
5 . 1 0
city Big
1500 400 97 . 4 ) 75 . 11 (lg 2 . 3
200 150 1 . 1 ) 54 . 1 (lg 29 . 8
city small or Medium ) 8 . 0 lg 56 . 1 ( ) 7 . 0 lg 1 . 1 (
) (
2
2

Tuning factor for long-haul propagation:
> + + +
=
20 )
20
)(lg 10 07 . 1 10 87 . 1 14 . 0 ( 1
20 1
8 . 0 3 4
d
d
h f
d
b

Tuning factors:
EET tuning factors
Also applicable in the COST-231 model.

Universal mode
141 141 141 141
First proposed by ERICSSON.
(ERICSSON , MSI similar model)
GSM900/1800
b
h
m
h
The communication distance is 135 km. (Can be longer)
One-stage formula:
street m d d clutter b b bCity
K h a L K K K h d K h K d K K L + + + + + + + = ) ( lg lg lg lg
5 4 3 2 1

Two-stage formula:
> + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + +
=
0 0 22 21 5 4 3 22 1
0 5 4 3 21 1
lg ) ( ) ( lg lg lg lg
) ( lg lg lg lg
d d d K K K h a L K K K h d K h K d K K
d d K h a L K K K h d K h K d K K
L
street m d d clutter b b
street m d d clutter b b
b

There can be more stages, depending on the propagation distance and calculation
precision. Generally the one stage or two stages will do.
=
MHz
MHz
K
1800 65 . 156
900 83 . 146
1

2
K =44.9.
3
K =-13.82.
4
K =-6.55.
5
K artificial environment tuning factor (it is 0 by default in cities).
d
K diffraction loss factor, valuating from 0 to 1 (generally it is 0.95 for rural areas,
0.65 for urban areas, and 0.8 for suburb areas.
d
L diffraction loss (for its calculation formula, see that for isolated hills in the
Okumura model.
142 142 142 142
h
b
, h
m
effective heights of the BS and MS antennae, counted in m. The unit of d is
km.
0
d is a customizable stage division point. It is 1 km by default.
) (
m
h a as described in the Okumura model.
street
K as described in the Okumura model. This parameter only applies to cities.
clutter
K clutter tuning factor. There are two optional methods:
A. Common method: use the clutter factor of the place where the MS lies. It is 0 by
default.
B. Improved method: as an option, select the weighted average of clutter tuning factors
of 1200 m from the MS to the BS (if the distance is less than 200 m, directly use the
clutter the place where the MS lies; if the distance is 200 m to 1200 m, use the actual
distance). The formula is as follows:
=

+
=
n
i
clutter clutter
i K i W n
n n
K
0
)] ( ) ( [
) 1 (
2

Where,
clutter
K actual tuning factor (i=0)
W(i)weight
isubscript
nsubscript at (d-x)=1200 m
ddistance between Tx and Rx
Here, the value of n depends on the resolution of the topographical data.
1
W(d-x)
R
x
-Position 200m 1200m d-x

143 143 143 143
Topographical tuning weight of 1200 m around the Rx
(Note: The value 200 m can also be changed, for example to 150 to get a better
propagation model.)
Suppose that the BS antenna is
s
g
h , the MS antenna is
m
mg
h , then
the effective height of the BS antenna, h
b
, is the value of (
s
h +
g
h -
mg
h ) and that of the
MS antenna is
m
h .
Tuning factors:
Different clutter tuning factors can both be set by the use (if there is already an
empirical value) and be got through test data tuning.
COST-231-Walfish-Ikegami model
The foundation of the macro cellular model is: the propagation loss from the BS to the
MS depends on the environment around the MS but within 1 km it is severely affected
by the buildings and street directions around the BS. Therefore, this model does not
apply to prediction for within 1 km.
The COST-231-Walfish-Ikegami model applies to propagation loss prediction for from
20 m to 5 km, serving as macro cellular model or micro cellular model. Micro cellular
coverage prediction requires detailed street and building data, not approximate value.
GSM900/1800.
This model applies to propagation model loss prediction in big, small, and micro cells.
Video on demand (VOD):
) ( ) (
lg 20 lg 26 6 . 42
MHz km b
f d L + + = limited to m d 20 .
Non-VOD:
msd rts b
L L L L + + =
0

<
> + + +
=
) 0 ( 0
lg 20 lg 10 lg 10 9 . 16
rts
Mobile roof ori Mobile
rts
L if
h h L h f
L

144 144 144 144
<
< +
< +
=
o o
o o
o
ori
L
90 55 ) 55 ( 114 . 0 0 . 4
55 35 ) 35 ( 075 . 0 5 . 2
35 0 354 . 0 10

<
+ + +
=
) 0 ( 0
lg 9 lg lg
msd
f d a bsh
msd
L if
b f K d K K L
L
> +
=
roof Base
roof Base Base
bsh
h h
h h h
L
0
) 1 lg( 18

L
0
free space propagation loss.
L
rts
diffraction and scatter loss from the raft to the street.
roof Base Base Mobile roof Mobile
h h h h h h = =
width of the street (m).
f calculation frequency (MHz).
Mobile
h its unit is m.
its unit is degree.
L
msd
multi-barrier diffraction loss.
145 145 145 145

h
Mobile
h
Mobile

b

d

h
Base

h
roof

h
Base

Base station
Incoming wave

Building
a Environment parameter
bStreet parameter
MS

<

>
=
roof Base Base
roof Base Base
roof Base
a
h h km d
d
h
h h km d h
h h
K
& 5 . 0
5 . 0
8 . 0 54
& 5 . 0 8 . 0 54
54

>
=
roof Base
roof
Base
roof Base
d
h h
h
h
h h
K
15 18
18

\
|

|
\
|

+ =
cities big to Applies 1
925
5 . 1
trees dense - medium with areas
and cities medium to Applies
1
925
7 . 0
4
f
f
K
f

Where, K
a
is the additional path loss when the BS antenna is lower than the rafts of
neighboring buildings and K
d
and K
f
respectively control the relations of L
msd
with
distance d and frequency f.
Tuning factors:
Can use the topographical tuning factor of the Okumura-Hata model.
146 146 146 146
K
h
upland tuning factor
K
sp
slope tuning factor
K
im
K
s
sea (lake) mixed path tuning factor
All these propagation models do not consider the effect of the landform. However, in
some environment the landform has a great effect on the propagation of electric waves.
Examples include buildings, groves, bamboo forests, fields of sugarcane or other crops
higher than 1.5 m, lakes, and seas.
In urban areas, indoor coverage greatly depends on the mean height, density, material,
structure, and wall thickness of buildings and directions the BS signals. As empirical
data show, due to Chinas poor economical and public security status, buildings in
medium and small cities, especially in their lower floors have metal security nets at the
doors and windows, which make the penetration loss as high as 2030 dB. As for shops
along streets, most of them use aluminum alloy door and have no windows, which also
poses a high penetration loss.
Groves, bamboo forests, and sugarcane fields has a high attenuation on electric waves,
especially 1900 MHz PCS systems. According to the test experience in Dehong, they
generally cause an attenuation of more than 30 dB. In addition, they cause fast shade
fading.
On lakes, electric wave propagation has a small attenuation. However, due to effects of
waves on the lake surface, there must be severe fading. For example, 450M wireless
access is hardly available in such areas. As for CDMA, as it is accepted by RAKE, it
must be able to overcome this situation. However, it is still never verified in such
environments.
If the condition permits, electric measurement must be conducted to find out the effects
of landform or propagation of electric waves. In link budgeting, it is also necessary to
consider the effect of the landform to get of more accurate coverage radium.
147 147 147 147
The WCDMA system uses the 2000 MHz frequency band. Test data show that the
traditional universal propagation model still applies at 2000 MHz, only that model
tuning is needed. The planning software AIRCOM can adjust propagation models.
Macro cells use the universal model, as described in the following:
RxLev=EiRP-Path_Loss
Path_Loss=K1+K2log(d)+K3(Hms)+K4log(Hms)+K5log(Heff)+K6log(Heff)log(d)+K
7(Diffraction Loss)+Clutter_Loss
Where, RxLev is the received signal power level (dBm);
EiRP is the BS effective radiated power (dBm);
Path_Loss is the mid-value of propagation path loss (dB);
K1 is the attenuation constant;
K2 is the distance attenuation factor;
K3 and K4 are MS antenna height tuning factors;
K5 and K6 are BS antenna height tuning factors;
K7 is the diffraction tuning factor
Clutter_Loss is clutter and landform attenuation tuning value;
d is the distance between the BS and the MS (km);
Hms is the effective height of the MS antenna (m);
Heff is the effective height of the BS antenna (m).
The effective height of the BS antenna is calculated as follows: Suppose that the BS
antenna is
s
g
h , the MS antenna
is
ms
mg
h , then the effective height
of the BS antenna, h
b
, is the value of (
s
h +
g
h -
mg
h ) and that of the MS antenna is
ms
h .
6.3.5 Transmission Model Tuning
6.3.5.1 Transmission Model Tuning Criterion
A multitude of engineering experience shows that when the land is flat, the model can
be considered as usable if the standard difference between the actually measured data
148 148 148 148
and the predicted data is not larger than 8 dB (or 11 dB for uplands) and the mean
value of actually measured data is not 3dB larger than the predicted data. The
verification process is as follows:
First, select several test points, for example 9, from a typical environment to uniformly
collect data. Then, provide 6 test points for model tuning. At last, use the tuned model
to predict the signal strength of another three similar environments to get the standard
difference and mean value difference.
You can understand the model judging criterion as follows: when predicted with a
usable model (the standard difference is not larger than 8 dB and the mean-value
difference is not larger than 3 dB), 68% points will have a difference within (-8
+8)dB from the actual measured data and 32% points will have a difference beyond
that range.
There are two methods to adjust the propagation model. One is through curve fitting
and the other is through network planning software. The following describes these two
methods.
6.3.5.2 Propagation Model Tuning Through Curve Fitting
The universal propagation model is as follows:
Pathloss = k1 + k2*lg(d) + k5*lg(Heff) + k6*lg(Heff)lg(d)
Where, d is the distance from the mobile test equipment to the BS antenna, counted in
km, and Heff is the effective height of the BS antenna, counted in m. Now, we take the
absolute height of the antenna as its effective height.
The measured sample data cannot be used to calibrate all of the four parameters k1, k2,
k5, and k6.If the data are from a same site and the drive test route is basically all on
flatland, the effective height of the antenna can be considered as consistent. You can fix
the value of k5 to -13.82 and that of k6 to -6.55.Therefore, you only need to adjust the
k1 and k2 parameters and this does not affect the accuracy.
However, if the test data are from sites of different antenna heights, it is incorrect to
mix all the data points and analyze them together. Instead, adjustment should be done
first. The following two sections describe test data analysis methods.
1. Analysis method for data from a same test site
If all data are from a same site and the drive test route is basically at the same altitude
149 149 149 149
as the BS, we can directly analyze the data samples to solve a simple equation to
get a rough universal model tuning result.
First, according to the test data and the antenna direction diagram, calculate out
the propagation loss at each sample point. Make the xy coordinate of the
distance logarithm and the corresponding path losses and then linearly fit the
sample data points through the least square method. According to the intercept
and gradient, we can find out the solutions to k1 and k2 of the universal model.
In practice, for the coordinate used to fit the straight line, the unit of the
horizontal axis is logarithmic meter and that of the vertical axis is dB. As the
distance unit used in the universal model is km, we can get the following
equation set:
k2 + k6 * lg(Heff) = gradient of the fitted line (1)
k1 3 * k2 + k5 * lg(h) 3 * k6 * lg(Heff) = intercept of the fitted line (2)
As Heff is a constant and the value of k5 and k6 are fixed, now we can work out
the solutions of k1 and k2.
2. Analysis method for data from different sites
If the data are from different sites which have different antenna heights, it will
not do to simply place all sampled pass loss data in one coordinate to fit the
straight line. This is because they correspond to losses calculated out using the
propagation model under different antenna heights and a simple [logarithmic
distance, path loss] coordinate cannot reflect this. A straight line so fitted will
make no sense.
To merge these data, we must first process them to compensate for differences
brought by different antenna heights.
When the antenna heights are h1 and h2, we can work out the difference of the
path losses with a same distance d through the following formula (note that the
unit of d is km).

pathloss
= k5 lg(h1/h2) + k6lg(d) lg(h1/h2) = (k5 + k6lg(d) ) * lg(h1/h2)
Therefore, we can set a reference antenna height h1, let that of the data source
cell be h2, and add a compensation value worked out through the above formula
to each data sample to use them to tune the propagation model.
150 150 150 150
If the horizontal axis unit used is logarithmic meter, the compensation value
should be calculated as follows:

pathloss
= (k5 3k6 + k6lg(d) ) * lg(h1/h2) the unit of d is meter
In practice, the values of k5 and k6 are the same as in the Hata model, that is,
-13.82 and -6.55.
6.3.5.3 Propagation Model Tuning Through Network Planning Software
1. Roughly tuning the model
The universal model in Hata equations is as follows:
RxLev=EiRP-Path_Loss
Path_Loss=K1+K2log(d)+K3(Hms)+K4log(Hms)+K5log(Heff)+K6log(Heff)log(d)+K
7(Diffraction Loss)+Clutter_Loss
In this method, information about the signal transmit system is all set to the planning
software so that we can accurately work out the EiRP of the signal source. Of all the
information, the antenna direction, tilt, and direction diagram and the location of the
signal source are very important to the accuracy of the model.
The propagation model is mainly tuned through the scatter diagram drawn by the
difference between the electric wave signal strength predicted according to the untuned
model and that measured and the corresponding propagation distance. Actually, none of
K3, K4, and K5 is easy for tuning or analysis, because as weights they correspond to a
reference that is the effective antenna height of the MS or transmit source and it is
uneasy to collect a multitude of data through changing the effective antenna height of
the MS or transmit source. In practice, for trial networks K3 and K4 are both used
without being calibrated and K5 evaluates to -13.82 as in the COST-231 model. Their
inaccuracy is made up through calibrating K1.For the same reason, K6 also evaluates
to its value in the COST-231 model, -6.55. Its inaccuracy is made up through adjusting
K2.
Adjustment of K1 and K2
In model tuning, we first adjust the gradient factor K2 to make Gradient in the Error. vs
log(distance) diagram to be 0dB/dec and then adjust the intercept factor K1 to make
Intercept in the Error. vs log(distance) diagram to be 0dB, as shown in the following
figure:
151 151 151 151

Error. Vs log (distance) Diagram
We can tune the model according to the output values of Gradient and Intercept. When
Gradient=0dB/dec and Intercept=0dB, through analysis we can see that the overall
mean error of the model is 0 in the outputted report. However, the mean error of other
clutters is not necessarily 0 (generally the mean error of none of these clutters is 0,
because the clutter factor is still tuned).
Adjustment of K7
The diffraction factor, K7, is used for consideration of diffraction loss in electric wave
propagation. There are many methods to calculate the diffraction loss, all needing clear
description of an accurate clutter (building, tree, and so on).As the diffraction factor
only takes a part when there is no line of sight (LOS) signals from the transmitter to the
receiver and K7 cannot include LOS signals, Non-LOS signals must be filtered out.
After these signals are filtered out, we can adjust K7 to make the model mean error in
the analysis output report evaluate to 0.
Tuning of K6 and readjustment of K1
After K7 is worked out, recover the LOS signals filtered out. Then output the Error. Vs
log (distance) diagram to see if the value of Gradient is 0. If it is not, adjust K6 to make
152 152 152 152
it be 0.After that, check if the model mean error in the analysis output report is 0. If it
is not, adjust K1 to make it be.
Combined adjustment of clutter and K6
According to the adjustments made earlier, check if the mean error of each clutter is 0
in the analysis output report. If that of a clutter is not, adjust the clutter offset to make it
be. After the clutter offsets are adjusted, maybe neither of Gradient and Intercept is 0 in
the Error. Vs log(distance) diagram. In that case, adjust K6 to make Gradient be 0.
However, this may make the mean errors of some clutters be non-zero again and we
need to adjust these clutters clutter offsets. Therefore, we need to adjust clutter offsets
and K6 in turn to make the final fitted straight line of the error point coincide with the
horizontal axis, that is, make both the mean error of each clutter and Gradient be 0.
After the rough adjustment, we get a rather accurate propagation model. To make the
model more accurate, we can make fine tuning on it.
2. Finely tuning the model
Fine tuning of the propagation model is to tune the following aspects of the
propagation model based on the rough tuning.
Fine tuning of the clutter tuning factor
In the model, there are two methods to set the clutter propagation loss. One is the offset
effect of clutters at the drive test point on the signal strength of electric waves received.
In this method, the parameters to adjust are the propagation loss offset factors of
different clutters. The other method of reflecting clutters effect on propagation of
electric waves is considering the effect of all clutters from the drive test point to the
cable connecting to the signal source. The following diagram describes this method:

153 153 153 153
According to this figure, to calculate the additional propagation loss caused by clutters
we can consider all clutters that are on the line from the MS to the transmit BS and are
d
through
away from the MS. The loss contributed by each kind of clutter depends on the
proportion of clutters of the kind in the d
through
as well as their distance from the MS. As
shown in the figure, weights ranging from 0 to 1 will be added to calculate the losses
caused by clutters of different distances on the path. This means the effect of remote
clutters will be smaller than that of near clutters. When using this method to adjust the
model, we need to set the influence quantity (the unit is dB/km) of each kind of clutter
on the propagation in unit distance and the range in which clutters will affect the
propagation, that is, d
through.

As all measured data all lies on roads and roads belong to the urban open area clutter
type, only considering effects of clutters at the drive test point cannot reflect the
propagation features of different clutters. In practice, the method shown in the above
figure is used to adjust the model. Considering various clutters on the propagation path,
this method can better reflect the influence quantity of each clutter.
First, ascertain the value of d
through
. From the view of geometry, d
through
should be at
least 250 m in a flat area if the signal source is 40 m high, the drive test point is 1 km
away from the signal source, and the clutters affecting propagation of electric waves
have a mean height of 10 m. In tuning, we must select a proper d
through
based on
comprehensive consideration.
After the range of d
through
is determined, start to adjust the penetration loss caused by
each kind of clutter. At the beginning of tuning clutter losses, for a clutter type whose
penetration loss value is to be adjusted, it is recommended to select data of clutters to
be examined in d
through
from the test data as main clutter data. As these test points
mainly reflect the characteristics of the clutters to examine, we can adjust the
penetration loss caused by clutters of the type. The adjusting method is still to observe
the scatter diagram of differences between predicted values of test points selected and
measured data to make the fitted straight line of the error point coincide with the
horizontal axis.
Fine tuning of K7
In the network planning software, there are various methods to calculate the diffraction
factor, K7. We can select different algorithms to readjust K7 so as to get a propagation
model of a smaller mean value and variance.
154 154 154 154
Adjustment of K3, K4, K5, and K6
In rough adjustment of the model, no factor only related to the BS or MS antenna
height is adjusted. In addition, network planning software provides many a method to
calculate antenna effective heights. Therefore, we can select different algorithms to
adjust the parameters to get the tuned value of each factor that is of the smallest mean
value and variance.
Two-stage model
As generally, near propagation environments have a great difference from the remote
ones, it is better to adjust the propagation model in the two-stage method to better
predict propagation losses of remote and near fields. To select the demarcation of
remote and near fields, refer to the Lee formula, d=4h1h2/.
Operations of tine tuning of the propagation model are the same as in rough tuning.
6.3.6 Propagation Model Tuning Result
The result of propagation model tuning is outputting a tuned universal propagation
model that satisfies the requirements on mean value and variance and includes tuning
factors K1K7 and the loss offsets of different clutters and landforms.
Mean Error is the statistical mean difference between predicted values and those
measured in drive test, RMS Error is the mean variance, and Std. Dev. Error the
standard difference. After you make Mean Error be 0 through setting clutter offsets,
RMS Error is equal to Std. Dev. Error.
RMS Error8dB is the criterion for judging the fitted degree, or convergence, of the
adjusted data with the prediction model. It is generally believed in the industry that
when a model whose RMS Error is 8dB is used to predict a new area of a similar
landform and clutters, the mean prediction difference will be 3dB. Therefore, if RMS
Error8dB, the model can be used as a foundation of network planning.
Generally speaking, we still use the standard difference as the foundation for judging.
Propagation model studies show that the standard difference of the propagation model
should be within 8 dB in flat areas or 11 dB in uplands. Generally, the standard
difference increases with the test distance and the frequency.

155 155 155 155
7 The Principal and Selection of Antenna
7.1 Overview of Base Station Antennae
Knowledge Point
This chapter introduces the development and the trends of the domestic antenna
industry in terms of basic concepts, principles, structure and classifications.
7.1.1 Development of Industry Technologies of BS Antennae
In 1897 Guglielmo Marconi (1874~1937) invented antenna and achieved the first ever
wireless communication in history. With over half a centurys development, antenna
technologies have been widely applied in military communication and civil
communication. Antenna becomes an industry. In a cellular mobile communication
system, base station (BS) antenna is the converter of the electrical signal of the
communication equipment and the spatial radio electromagnetic wave. It is the
connection hub of spatial wireless communication. The cellular communication system
requires the reliable communication from the BS to the mobile station (MS). The gain,
coverage direction, beam, available drive power, antenna configuration, polarization
mode, and other factors all affect the communication performance between systems.
7.1.2 Technical and Market Situations of Chinese Antenna Enterprises
According to related information, concerning the civil BS antenna, intelligent antenna,
and Bluetooth antenna, which are technically heavy-loaded in mobile communication,
spread communication, and microwave communication, the market share of the
domestic antennae of those types counts for only 20% or so. The scale and strength of
the national antenna enterprises are still far behind those of the foreign famous antenna
enterprises. According to incomplete statistics, as of the first half of 2002, the
communication antenna enterprises in the country amount to 100, most being medium-
and small-scale enterprises. Based on the annual production and the according sales
revenues, only Xi'an Haitian Antenna Technologies, Shenzhen Mobile Technologies,
Mobile Antenna Technologies, Kenbotong Communication, Shenglu Antenna, Tongyu
Communication Equipment, and a limited few reach the scale of 200 employees and a
156 156 156 156
sales revenue of RMB over 30 million.
Generally speaking, the national communication antenna industry of China is
characteristic of large number, small scale, and weak strength.
7.1.3 Competitive Advantages of Foreign Antenna Enterprises
The competitive advantages of foreign antenna enterprises are strong capital support,
high recognition of brand name, and in-depth human and technical reserve. Among
them, there are internationally well-known brand names that have been developed for
over half a century, with a sales revenue of over USD 2 billion. In the domestic market,
the largest domestic antenna enterprise has a sales revenue of only RMB 100 million, a
fragment of one percent of that of the foreign antenna heavyweights.
After the accession to the WTO by China, ADC, Andrew, Comtel Technology, and
Kathrein are the pioneer well-known international antenna enterprises that invested in
China and established joint ventures. They stir great impact on the national antenna
enterprises of China.
7.1.4 Development Direction of Antenna Industry
The development history of antenna is just 100 years. As radar is applied in military
facilities, antenna is critical to the countries and attracts much concern. In terms of
hardware, antenna is rather mature. To adapt to the requirements of modern
communication, the R&D of antenna branches off in a few directions: high integration,
broadband orientation, and multi-frequency and intelligent functioning. Currently,
dual-polarization, electronically adjustable downtilt, and multi-frequency multiplexing
antennae are gradually seeking their ways into commercial applications. Intelligent
antenna technologies have gained much ground in its development.
After twenty years development, the domestic antenna brands are shortening the gap
with foreign brands, and in terms of some indices, are at the same level as foreign
brands. In the country, the brand name recognition and credibility of domestic antennae,
but the gaps of capital and human resources reserve are still wide. The advantage of
domestic antennae lies in medium price, good service, and close distance to suit the
needs of communication construction.
157 157 157 157
7.2 Principles of Antenna Radiation
One of the important functions of antenna is to efficiently convert the electrical signal
of the transceiver into electromagnetic wave in the free space, or vice versa. The
efficient and capability of the electromagnetic wave of the antenna radiation is a
professional technology. The following is about some most basic radiation principles of
the antenna dipole.
7.2.1 Electromagnetic Wave Radiation
Principles of electromagnetic wave radiation: The vibration of electron and magnetron
generates an alternating field or a magnetic field, with the two converting mutually into
each other to form electromagnetic wave that radiates at the speed of light. When the
conductive wire has motion of an alternating current, it causes the radiation of
electromagnetic, with the radiation capacity related to the length and shape of the
conductive wire. As shown in Fig. 7.2-1a, if the distance between the two conductive
wires are short, the field is restricted between the two conductive wires, which causes
weak radiation. If the two conductive wires are separated with a wider distance, as
shown in Fig. 7.2-1b, the field promulgates to the surrounding space, which causes
strong radiation.
Please note that when the length L of the conductive wire is smaller than , the
radiation is weak. When the length L increases to the level that is comparable with the
wavelength, the current on the conductive wire will increase sharply, which causes
relatively strong radiation.

a b
Fig. 7.2-1
Antenna itself is an alternating current oscillator. The process as shown from Fig. 7.2-1a
to Fig. 7.2-1b can be considered the evolving process of the antenna. The modulated
158 158 158 158
high-frequency signal from the transmitter is sent via the feeder to the antenna, which
converts the high-frequency current energy into related electromagnetic wave energy
and radiates it to the space. It is the transmitting process of the antenna. Conversely, the
electromagnetic wave radiated in the space is converted at the antenna into
high-frequency current. It is the receiving process of the antenna.
Note
Antenna has a reverse capability which means that the transmitting antenna can work
as the receiving antenna, or vice versa. In addition, it means that the parameters of the
antenna as transmitter and the parameters of the antenna as receiver are kept unchanged.
It is the reciprocity theorem of antenna.
7.2.2 Symmetrical 1/2 wavelength Dipole
According to the Transmission Line Theory, when the length of the conductor is integer
multiples of 1/4 wavelength, the conductor shows oscillation feature on the frequency
of the wavelength, with the strongest radiation. However, as the part of the radiation
that exceeds 1/2 wavelength is opposed-phase and counteracts the radiation, the total
radiation effect is reduced. In this regard, antenna usually adopts 1/4 or 1/2 wavelength
as dipole length unit.
A dipole with the two rods of the same length is called symmetrical dipole. With the
length of the rod 1/4 wavelength, and the full length being 1/2 wavelength dipole, it is
called 1/2 wavelength symmetrical dipole, as shown in Fig. 7.2-2.
1/4
1/4
1/2
1/4
1/4
1/2
Wavelength
Wavelength
Wavelength Wavelength
Wavelength

Fig. 7.2-2 1/2 Wavelength Symmetrical Dipole
In addition, there is another alternative model of 1/2 wavelength symmetrical dipole. It
159 159 159 159
can be considered the narrow rectangle folded on the basis of a full-wavelength
symmetrical dipole, with the two ends of the full-wavelength dipole stacked. The
narrow rectangle is called folded dipole, as shown in Fig. 7.2-3.

Fig. 7.2-3 1/2 Wavelength Folded Dipole
Symmetrical dipole is the most typical and most widely applied antenna so far. A single
1/2 wavelength symmetrical dipole can be independently used, or multiple 1/2
wavelength symmetrical dipoles can form an antenna array.
7.3 Internal Structure and Classification of Common BS Antennae
and Indoor Antennae
7.3.1 Directional Patch Dipole BS Antennae
Directional patch antenna is a most important BS antenna that is most widely used. The
advantages of this type of antenna is high gain, ideal sectoral antenna pattern, small
back lobe, convenient control of declination angle of the antenna pattern on the vertical
plane, reliable sealing performance, and long life cycle.
For the outer view of the antenna, please refer to Fig. 7.3-1.
160 160 160 160

Fig. 7.3-1 Outer View of Directional Patch Antenna
7.3.1.1 Forming of High Gain of Patch Antenna
Multiple 1/2 wavelength dipoles are arranged to form a vertically placed linear array, as

Fig. 7.3-2 Vertical Antenna Pattern of 1/2 Dipole
Reflection plate is added on the side of the linear array to achieve horizontal directional
principle (take the 1/2 wavelength dipole vertical array for example), as shown in Fig.
7.3-3.
161 161 161 161
Horizontal pattern
Reflection
plate
Dual
dipoles
Reflection
plate
Dual
dipoles

Fig. 7.3-3 Antenna Pattern of 1/2 Wavelength Dipole with Reflection Plate
Currently, the design of the BS directional antenna by the antenna manufacturers all
adopts the structure of a patch dipole array. The dipoles selected are of two types.
7.3.1.2 Symmetrical Dipole
Standard 1/2 wavelength symmetrical dipole (on extra dipole added to reduce the
height off the ground of the dipole and the thickness of the antenna).

Fig. 7.3-4 Symmetrical 1/2 Wavelength Dipole
7.3.1.3 Micro-strip Dipole
The alternative of the 1/2 wavelength dipole that utilizes the 1/4 wavelength
transmission theorem to form radiation.
162 162 162 162

Fig. 7.3-5 Micro-strip Dipole
7.3.1.4 Array Structure of BS Antenna Dipoles
Coaxial dipole
array attentae
45 dual-polarization micro-strip
intersection curve patch antenna
45 dual-polarization
dipole array attenae
Dual-frequency
dipole array atennae

Fig. 7.3-6 Array Structures of BS Antenna Dipoles
7.3.2 Omni Serial Feeding BS Antennae
The omni antenna adopts the serial feeding of multiple 1/2 wavelength dipoles to
implement the synthesis and enhancement of the radiation gain.
163 163 163 163
Bottom feeding omni antenna
Bottom
feeding
Current
Amplitude
distribution
along the
cable

Fig. 7.3-7 1/2 Wavelength Dipole Serial Feeding
7.4 Concept and Significance of Antenna Technical Parameters
Knowledge Point
This chapter introduces the concepts of the technical indices of the BS antennae, and
describes the significance of the performance indices of the antennae in network
planning. Based on the classification of the antennae by performance indices, this
chapter also introduces how to select the antenna models in network planning.
7.4.1 Gain of Antenna
Gain is one of the most important parameters in the design of the antenna. By
increasing the gain value, the network coverage scope in a certain specific direction can
be increased, or the gain surplus in a specific scope can be increased. Any cellular
system is bidirectional process. At the meantime of increasing the gain value of the
antenna, the gain budget surplus of the bidirectional system is reduced.
The gain of the antenna refers to the power density ratio of the signals generated at the
same point in the space of the actual antenna and the ideal radiation unit under the
same input power condition. In other words, the gain of an antenna is the enlarged
multiple of the input power, compared with the ideal point source without direction,
concerning the radiation effect in the direction of the largest radiation. It describes
quantitatively the degree to which the antenna centralizes the input power and radiates
164 164 164 164
it. Gain is obviously related closely with the antenna pattern. The narrower the antenna
pattern is, the smaller the auxiliary lob, and the higher the gain.
The definition of the gain of an antenna is related to the 1/2 wavelength dipole or the
omni antenna. The omni radiator assumes that the radiation powers in all directions are
equal. The gain of the antenna in a certain direction is a value of the field strength
generated in this direction over the intensity by the omni radiator in this direction.
Generally the gain of the antenna has two units: dBd and dBi. dBi indicates the field
strength in the direction of the largest radiation of the antenna, compared with the
reference value of the omni radiator (as shown in Figure 2.1). The gain of a single 1/2
wavelength dipole (as shown in Figure 2.1) is G = 2.15 dBi. The gain of the antenna
compared with the 1/2 wavelength dipole (as shown in Figure 2.1) is indicated with
dBd. Obviously, the gain of a single 1/2 wavelength symmetrical dipole can be
indicated with G =0dBd.In this regard, dBd and dBi are applied to measure the fixed
dB difference of the antenna gain (as shown in the right of Figure 2.1), i.e., 0dBd =
2.15dBi.

Fig. 7.4-1 Different References of dBi and dBd
Currently the gain range of the domestic and foreign BS antennae varies from 0dBi to
over 20 dBi.
The gain of the antenna for indoor cellular coverage generally selects 0 to 8 dBi. The
outdoor BS ranges from omni antenna gain 9 dBi to directional antenna gain 10 dBi in
most cases. The antennae with a 20 dBi or so narrow beamwidth are usually applied for
the coverage of sparsely populated express highways.
7.5 Antenna Radiation Pattern
The antenna radiation pattern is the pattern based indication of the antenna radiation
feature in the spatial coordinate. It includes main lobe and side lobe. In particular, the
main lobe is the radiation lobe that covers the direction of the largest radiation. The
165 165 165 165
side lobe is the radiation lobe, other than the main lobe, that radiates other directions.
The BS antenna radiation pattern can be divided into two main types: omni radiation
pattern and directional radiation pattern, corresponding to omni antenna and directional
antenna, as shown in Fig. 7.5-1. In the left of the figure, it is the horizontal sectional
view and the dimensional radiation pattern of the omni antenna. In the right of the
figure, it is the horizontal sectional view and the dimensional radiation pattern of the
directional antenna.
1. In the case of omni antenna, even radiation is shown in the horizontal plane for
360, or non-directional. In the vertical direction, it is indicated as a beam with a
certain beamwidth. Generally the smaller the width of the lobe is, the larger the
gain is. For an omni antenna, the radiation intensity in all directions on the same
horizontal plane is equal in theory. It is applicable to the omni cell.
2. In the case of directional antenna, radiation in a scope of a certain angle is
shown in the horizontal plane, or directional. In the vertical direction, it is
indicated as a beam with a certain beamwidth. Like omni antenna, generally the
smaller the width of the lobe is, the larger the gain is. In the figure, the red part
is the metal reflection plate in the directional radome. It enables the direction of
the radiation of the antenna in the horizontal plane. It is applicable for the
coverage of sector cell, with a small coverage, high density of population, and
high utility efficient.

Fig. 7.5-1 Antenna Radiation Pattern
1 11 166 66 66 66
According to the networking requirements, BSs of different types can be equipped with
different types of antennae. The basis of selecting is the above technical parameters.
For example, an omni station adopts an omni antenna with basically the same gain at
all horizontal planes. A directional station adopts a directional antenna with different
gain values on different horizontal planes. Generally, directional antenna is selected in
downtown and suburb, whereas omni antenna is selected to achieve large scope of
coverage in the countryside.
7.6 Lobe Width
The antenna radiation pattern is an index to measure the transmitting/receiving capacity
of signal in different directions. Generally, it is indicated in a chart, showing the
relationship between the power intensity vector and the angle. On both sides of the
direction of the largest radiation of the main lobe, the angle of two vectors with a drop
of 3 dB radiation intensity (drop of power intensity by half) is defined to be the lobe
width (alternatively called beamwidth, main lobe width, or half power angle), as shown
in Fig. 7.6-1a. The narrower the lobe width is, the better the direction, the longer the
functioning distance, and the stronger the anti-interference capability. Another lobe
width is 10dB lobe width. As indicated by its name, it is the angle of two points with a
10dB drop of radiation intensity (drop of power intensity to the one tenth of the
original level), as shown in Fig. 7.6-1b.
-3dB point
Peak direction
(max. amplitude
direction)
-3dB point
-10dB point
-10dB point
Peak direction
(max. amplitude
direction)

a b
Fig. 7.6-1
167 167 167 167
7.6.1 Horizontal Lobe Width
The horizontal lobe pattern refers to the sectional view of the antenna pattern along the
section in the horizontal direction. The horizontal lobe width of an omni antenna is all
360 (right of Fig. 7.6-1). The common horizontal lobe 3 dB widths of the directional
antenna are 20, 30, 65, 90, 105, 120, 180 and others (left of Fig. 7.6-2).

Fig. 7.6-2 3dB BS Antenna Horizontal Lobe Width
In particular, in the cases of 20 and 30 widths, the gain is high. They are applied for
the coverage of the narrow land stripes or express highways. In the case of 65 width, it
is applied mostly in the typical three-sector BS configuration in the densely populated
city areas. In the case of 95 width, it is applied mostly in the typical three-sector BS
configuration in the suburban areas. In the case of 105 width, it is applied mostly in
the typical three-sector BS configuration in the sparsely populated areas. It is shown in
Fig. 7.6-3.

Fig. 7.6-3 Coverage of Three-sector BS Configuration
168 168 168 168
In the cases of 120 and 180, they are applied for the coverage of special-shaped
sectors with extra-wide angles.
7.6.2 Vertical Lobe Width
The vertical lobe 3 dB width of the antenna and the gain and horizontal 3 dB width of
the antenna are inseparable. The 3 dB width of the vertical lobe of the BS antenna is
about 10. Generally speaking, on the condition of the similar antenna design
technologies adopted, among the antennae of the same gain, the wider the horizontal
lobe is, the narrower the vertical lobe 3dB will be.
The relatively narrow 3 dB width of the vertical lobe will generate more coverage
dead zones, as shown in Fig. 7.6-4. With two antennae without downtilt hung at high
places, the wide vertical lobe in read generates a dead zone with the length being OX,
smaller than OX for that of the narrow vertical lobe in blue.
In model selection, to ensure the good coverage of the service areas and reduce dead
zones, in the condition of the same gain, the vertical lobe 3 dB width of the selected
antenna should be wide as much as possible.

Fig. 7.6-4 Selection of Vertical Lobe 3 dB Width of BS Antenna
7.7 1.1 Working Frequency Range of the Antenna
Both the transmitting antenna and the receiving antenna work in a certain frequency
range (bandwidth).For mobile communication systems, the bandwidth of an antenna is
usually its working frequency range when its VSWR does not exceed 1.5.
In practice, the working frequencies of the antenna selected shall include the required
169 169 169 169
frequencies.
For WCDMA radio system, the working frequencies of the antenna selected shall
include the frequencies required by the protocol: uplink frequency 1920 to 1980 and
downlink frequency 2110 to 2170.
For the GSM 900 system, all the dual-frequency antennae with the working frequency
of 890-960MHz, 870-960MHz, 807-960MHz and 890-1880MHz are workable.
824-896MHz antenna is selected for the CDMA800 system.
1850-1990MHz antenna is selected for the CDMA1900 system.
In order to reduce the out-of-band interfering signals, select the antenna with the
bandwidth that merely satisfies the demand.
7.8 Polarization Modes
The polarization direction of the antenna refers to the direction of the electric field
intension in antenna radiation. If the direction of the electric field intension is vertical
to the ground, the electric wave is defined as the vertical polarized wave. If its direction
is horizontal to the ground, it is defined as the horizontal polarized wave. The other two
single polarizations, +45 polarization and 45 polarization, are applied only in
unusual scenarios. For mobile communication system, most of the single polarization
antennae apply the transmitting mode of vertical linear polarization. There are 4 kinds
of single polarization modes (Fig. 7.8-1).

Fig. 7.8-1 Common Polarization Modes of BS Antenna
170 170 170 170
7.9 Downtilt Mode
To reinforce the coverage near the BS, and try to reduce dead zone as much as possible,
and meanwhile weaken the interference on other neighboring BS, the antenna should
not be too high, and employ the downtilt mode. Through antenna downtilt, the main
lobe of the antenna inclines for a certain angle, so as to decrease the power level of
adjacent BS, i.e., decrease the interference. As shown in Fig. 7.9-1, the dead zone of
yellow low-mount antenna and green downtilt antenna, OX and OX, are both less
than the dead zone of blue high-mount antenna with no downtilt angle, OX.

Fig. 7.9-1 Comparison of Antenna Downtilt in BS
Antenna downtilt modes fall into mechanical downtilt and electrical downtilt:
Mechanical downtilt: use the mechanical mode to adjust declination angle and move
antenna. After the antenna is installed vertical to the ground, required by the
optimization of network, adjust the support at the back of antenna to change the
declination angle of antenna. Practice proves that: the best declination angle of
mechanical antenna is 1 to 5 . When the declination angle changes within 5 to 10,
the antenna pattern changes a little. While further enlarging the declination angle of
antenna, the front of the coverage is obviously dented, and both sides are pressed flat.
The antenna pattern is distorted, so the front of antenna covers insufficient area and the
interference on the BSs at both sides are strengthened, as shown in Fig. 7.9-2. Another
shortcoming of mechanical downtilt is that the back lobe of antenna will be uptilted,
interfering neighboring sectors, and the user of high layer in neighboring sectors will
be dropped.
171 171 171 171

Fig. 7.9-2 Comparison of downtilt modes in BS
And, in daily maintenance, it is very difficult to adjust the antenna tile mechanically.
Generally, the maintainer needs to climb to the place where the antenna is installed and
adjust.
Electrical downtilt: adjust the declination angle and move the antenna electrically. The
principle of electrical downtilt is: by changing the phase of antenna vibrator of shared
linear array, change the vertical and horizontal component range, and change the
strength of component field, so that the antenna pattern is tilted. Since the field strength
of each antenna direction increases and decreases simultaneously, ensuring the antenna
direction not to change a lot after the declination angle is changed, the coverage
distance of main lobe direction is shortened, and the whole antenna pattern reduces
coverage area in the whole service cell while no interference is caused. The range of
electrical downtilt antenna is large. When it is more than 10, the antenna pattern is not
obviously distorted, and the back lobe of antenna is tilted simultaneously, and no
interference on the subscribers in high buildings at near end will be aroused. Therefore
mechanically adjusting antenna can decrease call loss and reduce interference.
Furthermore, electrically adjusting antenna enables adjusting declination angle of
vertical antenna pattern when the system is not stopped, monitoring the result of
adjusting in real time.
Use the electrically adjusting antenna in the area with heavy traffic and dense BSs. Use
traditional mechanical antenna in the suburbs and remote area with light traffic and
sparse BSs, and only requiring coverage.
7.10 Front/Back Ratio of Antenna
In the antenna pattern, the ratio of max. value of front and back lobes is called
172 172 172 172
front/back ratio, recorded as F/B. The front/back ratio of antenna indicates how good is
the suppression on back lobe. The bigger is F/B, the smaller is the back radiation (or
receiving) of the antenna, and the less possible is the trans-coverage of the back lobe
aroused.
The formula of F/B ratio is:
F/B=10Lg {(forward power density)/(backward power density)}
7.11 Input Impedance of Antenna, Zin
Antenna can be regarded as a resonance circuit. One resonance circuit has its
impedance which is required to be matched. The circuit connected with antenna must
have the same impedance as antenna. Definition: The ratio of signal current at the input
end of antenna and the signal current is called impedance of antenna. The best scenario
of antenna and feeder connection is that the antenna impedance is resistance and equals
the characteristic impedance of feeder. At this time, there is no power reflection and the
feeder end, and no standing wave at the feeder. The change of antenna impedance as
frequency changes is smooth.
The antenna matching is to clear the reactance component of antenna impedance,
making the resistance component nearest to characteristic impedance of feeder. Seen
from the formula, the impedance has resistance component Rin and reactance
component Xin, i.e., Zin = Rin + j Xin. The reactance component may weaken the
extraction of signal power done by antenna. Therefore, try to make reactance
component as zero, i.e., try to make the impedance of antenna as pure resistance.
In fact, even in the antenna very well designed and adjusted, its impedance includes a
very small reactance component value. Generally, the antenna impedance of mobile
communication is 50 .For any antenna, make adjustment through the antenna
impedance. Within the required work frequency range, the real part of impedance is
very small and imaginary part is very close to 50 , so that the antenna impedance is
Zin = Rin = 50 . This is necessary to ensure the impedance of antenna and that of
feeder to be well matched.
7.12 Antenna VSWR
Antenna VSWR is the index indicating how much the antenna feeder is matched with
173 173 173 173
BS (transceiver).It measures the antenna performance by taking the antenna as the
transmitted and reflected power ratio while transmitting antenna. VSWR is decided by
the impedance of antenna feeder system.
Definition of VSWR:
0 . 1
min
max
=
U
U
VSWR

Umax: In the place where the phase of incident wave is the same as that of reflecting
wave. Adding voltage amplitude is the max. voltage amplitude Umax, forming wave
loop.
Umin: In the place where the phase of indecent wave and that of reflection wave are
opposite, the difference of voltage amplitudes is min. amplitude Umin, forming wave
joint.
The generation of VSWR: because the incident wave power is transmitted to the
antenna input end and is not completely absorbed (radiation). Reflection wave is
generated and stacked to generate VSWR. The value of VSWR is between 1 and
infinite. VSWR is 1, indicating full match. VSWR is infinite, indicating full reflection
and full mismatch. The more is VSWR, the more is reflection, and the worse is match.
7.13 Side Lobe Suppression and Zero Filling
Since the antenna is normally installed in the iron tower and the top of high building to
cover the service area, the upward side lobe at the vertical face should be suppressed,
especially the first big side lobe. It can reduce unnecessary waste. Meanwhile,
strengthen the zero compensation of downward side lobe, so that the null depth in the
antenna pattern of this area is shallow, to improve the coverage in the area near the BS,
and reduce the dead zone and blind spot in the area near the BS. Fig. 7.13-1 is the
comparison of the antenna in the BS with and without null fill-in. The horizontal
coordinate is the distance from the BS, and the vertical coordinate is the signal strength
value on the ground.
174 174 174 174

Fig. 7.13-1 Comparison of the Antenna in the BS with and without Null Fill-in
Null fill-in value of antenna = (First null amplitude value in vertical direction / max.
amplitude value in the radiation direction)%
= 20log (First null amplitude value in vertical direction /
max. amplitude value in the radiation direction) dB
To ensure better coverage of the service area, the antenna with no side lobe suppression
nor null fill-in can not be used.
7.14 IM 3rd Order
The IM.3rd order of most foreign brands can reach -150dBC@243dBm.While
common IM.3rd order of antenna is only -130dBC@243dBm , related to the antenna
design and connector selection. Since the receiving signal of BS is much weaker than
the transmitting signal, once the inter-modulation products of the transmitting signal of
multi-path frequencies fall into receiving band, the BS can not work normally.
7.15 Isolation between Ports
While multi-port antenna is used, the isolation between ports should be more than
175 175 175 175
30dB.For example, for two different polarization ports of dual-polarization antenna,
two ports of different bands of outdoor dual-frequency antenna, four ports of
dual-frequency and dual-polarization antenna, the isolation should be more than 30dB.
5.4 Radio Parameters of Antenna
Antenna is a part of transceiver system and the key component of wireless
communication system. In terms of radio network planning, what we care for cover
two factors: electrical parameters and engineering parameters.
7.16 Antenna Radiation Pattern
The antenna radiation pattern is the pattern based indication of the antenna radiation
feature in the spatial coordinate. It includes main lobe and side lobe. In particular, the
main lobe is the radiation lobe that covers the direction of the largest radiation. The
side lobe is the radiation lobe, other than the main lobe, that radiates other
directions.The narrower the width of the lobe, the more the direction functional and the
transfer distance and anti-interference effect are enhanced.

Figure 7.16-1 65specified direction antenna horizon lobe

Figure 7.16-2 65specified direction antenna vertical lobe
176 176 176 176

Figure 7.16-3 Omni-direction antenna horizon and vertical lobe
7.17 Gain of Antenna
Gain is one of the most important parameters in the design of the antenna. By
increasing the gain value, the network coverage scope in a certain specific direction can
be increased, or the gain surplus in a specific scope can be increased. Any cellular
system is bidirectional process. At the meantime of increasing the gain value of the
antenna, the gain budget surplus of the bidirectional system is reduced.
The gain of the antenna refers to the power density ratio of the signals generated at the
same point in the space of the actual antenna and the ideal radiation unit under the
same input power condition. In other words, the gain of an antenna is the enlarged
multiple of the input power, compared with the ideal point source without direction,
concerning the radiation effect in the direction of the largest radiation. It describes
quantitatively the degree to which the antenna centralizes the input power and radiates
it. Gain is obviously related closely with the antenna pattern. The narrower the antenna
pattern is, the smaller the auxiliary lob, and the higher the gain.

Figure 7.17-1 Ideal point sourse
177 177 177 177

Figure 7.17-2 Omni-direction antenna

Figure 7.17-3 the comparison of Omni-direction antenna and Ideal point sourse
7.18 Input Impedance of Antenna, Zin
Antenna can be regarded as a resonance circuit. One resonance circuit has its
impedance which is required to be matched. The circuit connected with antenna must
have the same impedance as antenna. Definition: The ratio of signal current at the input
end of antenna and the signal current is called impedance of antenna. The best scenario
of antenna and feeder connection is that the antenna impedance is resistance and equals
the characteristic impedance of feeder. At this time, there is no power reflection and the
feeder end, and no standing wave at the feeder. The change of antenna impedance as
frequency changes is smooth.
The antenna matching is to clear the reactance component of antenna impedance,
making the resistance component nearest to characteristic impedance of feeder. Seen
from the formula, the impedance has resistance component Rin and reactance
component Xin, i.e., Zin = Rin + j Xin. The reactance component may weaken the
extraction of signal power done by antenna. Therefore, try to make reactance
component as zero, i.e., try to make the impedance of antenna as pure resistance.
In fact, even in the antenna very well designed and adjusted, its impedance includes a
very small reactance component value. Generally, the antenna impedance of mobile
communication is 50 .For any antenna, make adjustment through the antenna
impedance. Within the required work frequency range, the real part of impedance is
very small and imaginary part is very close to 50 , so that the antenna impedance is
Zin = Rin = 50 . This is necessary to ensure the impedance of antenna and that of
feeder to be well matched.
178 178 178 178
7.19 Antenna VSWR
A proper VSWR index is to balance the number of lost power and manufacturing cost.
In mobile communication system, VSWR is required to be less than 1.5, and VSWR in
practice should be less than 1.2
A too high VSWR may decrease the coverage of BS, and increase the interference
inside the system, influencing the service performance of BS.
7.20 Antenna Polarization
The polarization modes of electromagnetic wave may be divided into linear polarized
wave and circular polarized wave. The linear polarized wave may be divided into
horizontal polarized wave and vertical polarized wave. The circular polarized wave
may be divided into clockwise polarized wave and anti-clockwise polarized wave
according to the different rotation directions of the electric field. Most of the BS
antennae apply linear polarization mode.
Combine the vertical polarization antenna and the horizontal polarization antenna
together, or combine +45 polarization antenna and 45 polarization antenna together,
a new kind of antenna, the dual-polarization antenna, will be combined. Currently,
most of the dual-polarization antennae apply 45 dual linear polarization mode. As a
dual-polarization antenna is assembled by combining two antennae with orthogonal
polarization packed in the same antenna cover (Fig. 7.20-1), the number of the
antennae installed will be greatly reduced if apply dual-polarization antenna, which
will result in the simplification of the antenna installation process, the reduction of the
cost and the saving of the space for antenna installation.

Fig. 7.20-1 Dual-polarization BS Antenna
179 179 179 179
7.21 Front/Back Ratio of Antenna
The formula of F/B ratio is:
F/B=10Lg {(forward power density)/(backward power density)}
Backward
power
Forward
power

Fig. 7.21-1 Antenna F/B Ratio
Antenna F/B is related to the electrical dimensions of reflecting board of antenna. Big
electrical dimensions provides better F/B. For example, 3dB horizontal lobe and 65
wide antenna is larger than 3dB horizontal lobe and 90 wide antenna, therefore, F/B of
3dB horizontal lobe and 65 wide antenna is better than that of 3dB horizontal lobe and
90 wide antenna. F/B of antenna is generally 25-30dB. Prefer to selecting the antenna
with F/B as 30.And F/B of outdoor antenna is generally more than 25dB. Since the size
of cell antenna is small, the F/B range of antenna should be larger.
7.22 Azimuth Angle of Antenna
Azimuth angle of antenna is an important project parameter. Modifying the azimuth
angle of antenna is very important to the network quality of mobile communication. On
the one hand, accurate azimuth angle of antenna can ensure that the actual coverage of
BS is the same as the expected coverage, ensuring the running quality of the whole
network. On the other hand, adjusting the azimuth angle properly according to the
traffic or the specific situation of the network can better optimize the existing mobile
communication network.
According to ideal model of cell mobile communication, directional BS is divided into
three cells, i.e.,:
Cell A: azimuth angle 0 degree, antenna directing north;
Cell B: azimuth angle 120 degree, antenna directing south east;
180 180 180 180
Cell C: azimuth angle 240 degree, antenna directing south west;
But in actual network, we may adjust the azimuth angle of antenna. Normally to adjust
azimuth angle of antenna is based on the following three scenarios:
1. Because of the topology, such as tall building, high mountain and water surface
etc., the signal may be refracted or reflected, so that the actual coverage is quite
different from the ideal model. Then we may properly adjust the azimuth angle
of antenna according to actual network situation, to ensure the signal strength in
the area of weak signal, so as to optimize the network;
2. On the other hand, the difference of population density leads the unbalance of
traffic in the cell the antenna covers. We may adjust the direction. We may adjust
the azimuth angle of antenna to balance the traffic.
3. In the dead zone or the area with weak signal, we can also adjust the azimuth
angle of antenna to optimize the network.
7.23 Antenna Height
Antenna height is also called hanging height of antenna, generally referring to the
vertical distance from the central position of antenna to the floor. Antenna height has
strong infect on path loss. While the parameters of receiver and transmitter are fixed,
the coverage area is in direct ratio with the antenna height.
On one hand, the antenna height should be higher than the average height of the
buildings in the coverage area. On the other hand, the antenna can not be too high,
avoiding interference on neighboring area. Based on the density and average height of
current buildings, the proper antenna in cities is 35 meters, whereas the proper antenna
height in the countryside is 50 meters.
7.24 Downtilt Mode
Define the angle between the direction of the largest gain of vertical lobe and
horizontal direction as antenna declination angle. Actually, the value of antenna
declination angle is directly related to antenna height, coverage radius, vertical lobe of
antenna, electrical downtilt parameter. If the covering radius is fixed, the higher the
antenna is, the bigger the needed tile angle is. On the contrary, if the antenna height is
fixed, the smaller the covering radius is, the bigger the needed antenna downtilt is.
181 181 181 181
In the city with dense BSs, the BSs may easily interfere with each other. To ensure
most power to radiate in the coverage area, and decrease the interference on adjacent
cells, while setting the initial declination angle of antenna, the half power point on the
major plan of the antenna should point to the edge of coverage area. The formula is
follows:
= act(H/L)X(180/)+(/2)-e
In the suburb, countryside, country road, and sea surface etc., to make the coverage as
wide as possible, decrease the initial declination angle, point the max. gain point of
main lobe to the edge of coverage area. The formula of declination angle is follows:
= act(H/L)X(180/)-e
In the above formulas,
is the initial declination angle of the antenna (unit: degree).h
H indicates the valid height of BS, that is, the difference of the hanging height of
antenna and the average height of surrounding coverage area (unit: meter).
L indicates the edge distance needed to be covered from the antenna of the BS to the
sector (unit: meter).
indicates the vertical lobe width of the antenna (unit: degree).
e indicates the declination angle of the antenna (unit: degree).
5.7 Classification of Antenna
From function: Communication Antenna, TV Antenna and Radar Antenna
From frequency band: Short-wave Antenna, Ultrashort-wave Antenna and
Micro-wave Antenna
From outline: Linear Antenna and Plane Antenna
From direction: Directional Antenna and Omni-directional Antenna
7.25 Antenna Parameter Examples
1. Take Kathrein antenna for example to introduce the parameter value of outdoor
antenna.
182 182 182 182
1) 65 direction 45 dual-polarization antenna
UMWD-06516-4D 45 Diversity Panel
Frequency (MHz)
1710 -
1880
1850 -
1990
1900 -
2170
Gain dBd/dBi 15.3/17.4 15.6/17.7 15.8/17.9
Horizontal BW() 65 65 65
Vertical BW() 7 6.5 6
Polarization +45/-45 +45/-45 +45/-45
Vertical Beam Tilt() 4 4 4
Isolation >30 >30 >30
VSWR <1.5:1 <1.5:1 <1.5:1
USLS >15 >16 >16
Front to Back Ratio 25 25 25
Size: LxWxD(inch/mm) 54.4x6.8x3.5 /1381x172x88
Wind Load (lbf/N) 101/449
Connector Type 7/16 DIN-Female

Connector Location Bottom
2) 360 omni antenna
Kathrein UBO-1940N
Frequency range 17102170 MHz (broadband)
Gain 2 dBi
Impedance 50 ohms
VSWR < 1.5:1
Polarization Vertical
Maximum input power 50 watts (at 50C)
H-plane beamwidth Omni
E-plane beamwidth 78
Connector N female
Weight 0.33 lb (150 g)
Height 4.55 inches (115 mm)
Radome diameter 0.78 inches (20 mm)
Mounting Mounts through a 0.63 inch

The value of outdoor antenna parameter should also note the hanging height of
antenna. When the parameter of receiver and transmitter is fixed, the height and
gain of coverage area are in direct ratio. Note whether the installation mode of
antenna is tower installation mode or the installation mode of installation pole.
183 183 183 183
2. Take the antennae of Tongyu Communication Equipment of Zhongshan for
example to introduce the parameter value of omni antennae.
Tongyu Communication Equipment of Zhongshan, TQI-4FE
8242500 MHz
Gain 3 dBi
Impedance 50 ohms
VSWR < 1.4:1
Maximum input power 50 watts (at 50C)
H-plane beamwidth Omni
E-plane beamwidth 70
Connector N female
Weight 500g
Height 85 mm

Note
The parameters such as radiation mode (antenna pattern), gain, impedance, VSWR, and
polarization mode are important parameters that indicate the antenna performance of
communication system. The Industry standard of communication antenna defines
various parameter value ranges. Generally the performance of antenna provided in the
market is better than the industry standard.
7.26 Antenna Model Selection
Knowledge Point
This chapter introduces the classification of the scenarios where the BS antennae are
applied, the principle of the antenna model selection, and the antenna model selection
for different environments.
184 184 184 184
7.27 Classification of Antenna Application Scenarios
7.27.1 High-density Urban Areas

7.27.2 General Areas (Cities and Towns)

7.27.3 Suburb (Township) and Countryside

7.27.4 Railways and Express Highways (Highways)

185 185 185 185
7.27.5 Scenery Spots

7.28 Antenna Model Selection
7.28.1 Basic Principles of Antenna Model Selection
1. Must select the antenna qualified and approved by the third party, the product
must comply with the standards stipulated by the Ministry of Information
Industry.
Implement environmental experiments such as the environments of high
temperature, low temperature, vibration, impact and transportation.
2. The VSWR and the 3rd order inter-modulation of the antenna must be tested and
100% approved.
3. For WCDMA wireless system, the working frequency band of the selected
antenna should include the frequency band required by the protocol: the uplink
frequency 1920 to 1980 and the downlink frequency 2110 to 2170.
The width band selection should be subject to satisfying the demand.4. Select
shaped-beam antenna (upper side lobe suppression and lower side lobe null
fill-in) to eliminate the interference from other BSs and to avoid the problem of
light shadow.
4. Select the electronic downtilt antenna for the high-density areas and the areas
with complicated environment.
5. Select 65 directional 45 dual-polarization antenna for the urban areas.
6. Select 65 directional 45 dual-polarization antenna for the highways.
186 186 186 186
7.28.2 High-density Urban Areas
7.28.2.1 Areas with Dense Traffic
In the high-density areas of the metropolitans such as Beijing and Shanghai, the
coverage areas cover luxury commercial centers and deluxe offices. The coverage
radius of each BS is relatively small because the numbers of BSs are located at the
same area. In addition, there are lots of indoor coverage systems in the coverage area,
and it is very difficult to select the sites to deploy the BSs because of the fluctuation of
the BSs in the high-density urban areas. The chance to adjust RF system is quite
frequent because the radio environment of the high-density urban area is extremely
complicated. For the above-mentioned reasons, the coverage radius of the BS in the
urban area must be restrained. A larger downtilt angle is needed to eliminate the
interference to the adjacent cells. The antenna beam will be distorted if using the
antenna with a too large mechanical angle. It is very inconvenient for the optimization
because it is even more difficult to control the radio signal. So the antenna with
electronic downtilt must be applied.
The distance between the BSs is about 300 to 500 meters in the high-density areas with
dense traffic. We should select the antenna with adjustable electronic downtilt or the
antenna with fixed electronic downtilt over 6.
Take the following types of antennae for example:
Internal Model
of Manufacturer
Type
Frequency
Range
(MHz)
Gain
(dBd/dBi
)
Angle (C)
Horizontal
Lobe
AP15-1940/065
D/ADT/XP
45 Diversity Panel 1710-2170 15 Adjustable 65
UMWD-06513-
XD
45 Diversity Panel
1900 -
2170
12.4/14.5 0-14 63
UMWD-06516A
-XD
45 Diversity Panel
1900 -
2170
15.7/17.8 010 63
UXM-1710-2100
-65-15i-A-D
45 Diversity Panel 1710-2170 15 0 16 65
MB3G-65-15.5D 45 Diversity Panel 1920-2170 15.5 0-8 65/10.5
When installing the antenna, the fixing component can allow 14 or so of mechanical
downtilt. In practical installation, the main lobe of the antenna will be distorted if it tilts
over 10 mechanically, therefore, the mechanical downtilt should not exceed 10. The
187 187 187 187
horizontal half-power width will not be distorted when the main lobe tilts at the range
between 10 to 20 if the electronic downtilt works with the mechanical downtilt.
Therefore, the need to control the coverage radius in the areas with dense traffic can be
met in this way.
7.28.2.2 Areas With Moderate Traffic
For the provincial capitals or the secondary central areas of the metropolitans such as
Beijing and Shanghai, the coverage areas cover plenty of commercial centers and some
luxury houses. The distance between the BSs is about 500 to 700 meters. The BSs are
also in dense condition with a small coverage radius. The antenna with an internal
electronic downtilt of 4 to 6 and horizontal half-power lobe width in 65 direction
must be applied to restrain the interference with the adjacent sectors. In this way, the
horizontal half-power width will not be distorted when the main lobe tilts at the range
between 6 to 16, and the areas with moderate traffic can be covered without
interference.
Internal Model of
Manufacturer
Type
Frequency
Range
(MHz)
Gain
(dBd/dBi)
Angle
(C)
Horizontal
Lobe
UMWD-06516-6D
45
Diversity
Panel
1900 -
2170
15.5/17.6 6 65
UMWD-06516-6D
Vertical
Polarization
Panel
1900 -
2170
15.9/18 4 65
UXM1710-2100-65-15.5i-6-D
45
Diversity
Panel
1710-2170 15 6 65
7.28.2.3 Areas with Relatively Sparse Traffic
For the areas with well-planned residential apartments and some commercial buildings,
the distance between the BSs can be as wide as 700 to 900 meters or so. The horizontal
half-power width will not be distorted when the main lobe tilts at the range between 2
to 4 if the antenna is applied with an internal electronic downtilt of 2 to 4 and
horizontal half-power lobe width in 65 direction, and the areas with sparse traffic can
be covered without interference.
188 188 188 188
Internal Model of
Manufacturer
Type
Frequency
Range (MHz)
Gain
(dBd/dBi)
Angle
(C)
Horizontal
Lobe
UMWD-06517-2D
45 Diversity
Panel
19002170 16.9/19 2 63
UMWD-06517-4D
45 Diversity
Panel
19002170 16.6/18.7 4 63
UMWD-06516-2D
Vertical
Polarization
Panel
19002170 16/18.1 2 65
AP18-1940/065D/DT
2/XP
45 Diversity
Panel
1710-2170 18 2 65
UXM-1710-2100-65-
18i-2-D
45 Diversity
Panel
1710-2170 18 2 65
7.28.3 General Urban Areas
For those general urban areas with residential districts as the main body, such as the
well-planned commercial apartments, the living zones of the enterprises and
governmental sections, and the ordinary residence, there may be some low bungalows
and old-fashion two-storey buildings in such areas. The traffic in those areas is
relatively small. In addition, the radio environment of the coverage area is considerable
good because the buildings there are low. The coverage in such areas is the top priority.
The distance between the BSs ranged within 1 km to 2 km. The single-polarized space
diversity or dual-polarization antenna, such as the considerably high-gain 65
directional antenna can be applied. At the edge of the network, the 11 dB 90
directional antenna may be applied.
Internal Model of
Manufacturer
Type
Frequency
Range (MHz)
Gain
(dBd/dBi)
Angle
(C)
Horizontal
Lobe
742-186
45 Diversity
Panel
1710-2170 20.2 0 63
UMWD-06516-0D
45 Diversity
Panel
1900 - 2170 16/18.1 0 65
UMWD-06517-0D
45 Diversity
Panel
1900 - 2170 17.2/19.3 0 63
UXM-1710-2100-6
5-15.5i-0-D
45 Diversity
Panel
1710-2170 15 0 65
189 189 189 189
Internal Model of
Manufacturer
Type
Frequency
Range (MHz)
Gain
(dBd/dBi)
Angle
(C)
Horizontal
Lobe
UXM-1710-2100-6
5-18i-0-D
45 Diversity
Panel
1710-2170 18 0 65
MB3G-65-13
Vertical
Polarization
1920-2170 13 0 65/14
AP12-1940/088D/
XP
45 Diversity
Panel
1710-2170 11.7 0 88
UMW-09015-0D
Vertical
Polarization
1900 - 2170 14.8/16.9 0 90
7.28.4 Suburb, Twonships, and Countryside
In the case of small traffic, the concern is large coverage. The radio environment is
great because the BSs are considerably in high position in comparison with the low
buildings in the coverage area.
If possible, always select the 65 directional antenna for the coverage area with a clear
direction. Usually select the same antenna as that of the general urban area.
If possible, always select 90 degrees high-gain antenna for the coverage area with a
certain degree of direction, such areas usually have very big coverage and have some
traffic.
For the coverage area without a clear direction and with a relatively big coverage, the
high-gain omni antenna should be applied. In order not to run into the problem of
darkness under a light due to the fact that the antenna has been deployed at a too
high position, select the omni antenna with 3, 5, and 7 main beam downtilt
according to the height of the BS.
Internal Model of
Manufacturer
Type
Frequency
Range
(MHz)
Gain
(dBd/dBi)
Angle
(C)
Horizontal
Lobe
UBO-1940N
Vertical
Polarization 1710-2170 2 0 360
MB3G-OA-11
Vertical
Polarization 1920-2170
11 3 360
190 190 190 190
7.28.5 Railways and Express Highways (Highways)
7.28.5.1 Highways in Plain or Grassland
For the highways (express highways) on plain or grassland, the coverage radius of a
BS at a height of 50 meters covers 5 km to 8 km or even larger because such areas are
always flat and wide.
If just consider the seamless cover of the highway, the high-gain antenna with
relatively narrow horizontal and vertical beam lobe should be selected, for example:
Internal Model of
Manufacturer
Type
Frequency
Range
(MHz)
Gain
(dBd/dBi)
Angle (C)
Horizontal
Lobe
UMWD-03319-2
D
45 Diversity
Panel
1900-2170 18.2/20.3 2 30
AP21-1940/030D
/ADT/XP
45 Diversity
Panel
1710-2170 20.7 Adjustable 30
If the coverage area not only covers the highways but also other areas, the 65, 90, or
360 antennae should be selected according to the practical requirement.
Internal Model of
Manufacturer
Type
Frequency
Range
(MHz)
Gain
(dBd/dBi)
Angle
(C)
Horizonta
l Lobe
742-186
45 Diversity
Panel
1710-2170 20.2 0 63
UMWD-06516-0
D
45 Diversity
Panel
1900 - 2170 16/18.1 0 65
AP12-1940/088D/
XP
45 Diversity
Panel
1710-2170 11.7 0 88
UMW-09015-0D
Vertical
Polarization
1900 - 2170 14.8/16.9 0 90
UBO-1940N
Vertical
Polarization
1710-2170 2 0 360
MB3G-OA-11
Vertical
Polarization
1920-2170 11 3 360
7.28.5.2 Highways in Hilly or Mountainous Areas
The highways and the express highways in the hilly and mountainous areas always
wind their ways across the valleys. The traffic is very small, but the radio signal
multi-path and attenuation are serious because the highways are often shielded by the
mountains close by. The coverage radius of the BS is about 3 km to 5 km, or even
191 191 191 191
smaller. To get a better coverage in such a radio environment, the high-gain antenna
with narrow horizontal beamwidth is a good choice because the electromagnetic energy
is more concentrative.
Internal Model of
Manufacturer
Type
Frequency
Range (MHz)
Gain
(dBd/dBi)
Angle (C)
Horizontal
Lobe
800-10251
45 Diversity
Panel
1710-2170 19.8 Adjustable 35
AP21-1940/030D/A
DT/XP
45 Diversity
Panel
1710-2170 20.7 Adjustable 30
UMWD-03319-2D
45 Diversity
Panel
1900 - 2170 18.2/20.3 2 31
DB992HG28N-B
Vertical
Polarization
2170 - 2490 14.9/17 0 25
742-186
45 Diversity
Panel
1710-2170 20.2 0 63
UMWD-06516-0D
45 Diversity
Panel
1900 - 2170 16/18.1 0 65
UMWD-06517-0D
45 Diversity
Panel
1900 - 2170 17.2/19.3 0 63
UXM-1710-2100-6
5-15.5i-0-D
45 Diversity
Panel
1710-2170 15 0 65
7.28.5.3 Highways across Cities or Towns
For the coverage areas cover railways/highways and countryside and towns with small
traffic, the omni antenna or the antenna with large horizontal lobe angle should be
applied to achieve the best result.
Internal Model of
Manufacturer
Type
Frequency
Range (MHz)
Gain
(dBd/dBi)
Angle (C)
Horizontal
Lobe
AP12-1940/088D/XP
45 Diversity
Panel
1710-2170 11.7 0 88
UMW-09015-0D
Vertical
Polarization
1900 2170 14.8/16.9 0 90
UBO-1940N
Vertical
Polarization
1710-2170 2 0 360
MB3G-OA-11
Vertical
Polarization
1920-2170 11 3 360
192 192 192 192
7.28.5.4 Mountain Highways
The antenna should be selected according to terrain, objects, the changes of the height
of the mountains, the BS location and the coverage radius.
Generally speaking, the following antennae should be selected prior to the others if the
BS is located at the peak of the mountain:
Internal Model of
Manufacturer
Type
Frequency
Range
(MHz)
Gain
(dBd/dBi)
Angle
(C)
Horizonta
l Lobe
UMWD-06516-6D
45 Diversity
Panel 45
Diversity Panel
1900
2170
15.5/17.6 6 65
UXM1710-2100-65-1
5.5i-6-D
45 Diversity
Panel
1710-2170 15 6 65
UMWD-09016-XD
45 Diversity
Panel
1900
2170
15.5/17.6 0-5 90
UMWD-09014-6D
45 Diversity
Panel
1900
2170
12.8/14.9 6 90
7.28.6 Scenery Spots
7.28.6.1 Scenery Spots Far away from Cities
The natural scenery spots such as famous mountains and beautiful rivers are far way
from the hustle and bustle of the cities. The radio signal in the scenery spot will not
intermix with those of the cities because they have been separated geographically.
Visits to such scenery spots are obviously seasonal. In addition, the visitors usually
gather at certain spots.
There are no restraint to the height of the antenna in such scenery spots. If the traffic is
not so huge, we usually select the control point of the scenery spot as the location of
the machine room and apply omni antenna.
Internal Model of
Manufacturer
Type
Frequency
Range
(MHz)
Gain
(dBd/dBi)
Angle
(C)
Horizontal
Lobe
UBO-1940N
Vertical
Polarization
1710-2170 2 0 360
MB3G-OA-11
Vertical
Polarization
1920-2170 11 3 360
For those popular scenery spots with considerable large traffic, we must utilize the
193 193 193 193
mountain body or other natural objects for separation and apply layered coverage
solutions. In those cases, the low gain antenna with small horizontal beamwidth, which
is easy to be controlled, should be selected.
Internal Model of
Manufacturer
Type
Frequency
Range
(MHz)
Gain
(dBd/dBi)
Angle
(C)
Horizontal
Lobe
DB992HG28N-B Flat Panel 1710 - 2170 13.9/16 0 30
AP12-1940/065/DT2/XP
45 Diversity
Panel
1710-2170 12 2 65
UMWD-09014-0D
45 Diversity
Panel
1900 - 2170 13.8/15.9 0 90
7.28.6.2 Scenery Spots in Suburban Areas
The signal in the scenery spots at suburban areas will overlay the signal from the BSs
in the urban areas easily because those spots are close to the urban areas. Therefore, the
height of the BS must be restrained strictly in order not to interfere with the BSs in the
urban areas.
Internal Model of
Manufacturer
Type
Frequency
Range
(MHz)
Gain
(dBd/dBi)
Angle
(C)
Horizontal
Lobe
UMWD-06517-2D
45 Diversity
Panel
1900-2170 16.9/19 2 63
UMWD-06517-4D
45 Diversity
Panel
1900-2170 16.6/18.7 4 63
UMW-06516-2D
Panel Vertical
Polarization
1900-2170 16/18.1 2 65
AP18-1940/065D/DT2
/XP
45 Diversity
Panel
1710-2170 18 2 65
UXM-1710-2100-65-1
8i-2-D
45 Diversity
Panel
1710-2170 18 2 65
7.28.6.3 Scenery Spots in Downtown Areas
Those scenery spots in downtown areas have very high humanistic value and cannot be
counted in money. The indoor distributed systems cannot be applied for the safety of
the scenery spots. The sole solution is to set up BSs closely and utilize the outdoor
signal for indoor coverage. In addition, it will greatly influence the radio network of
the entire city because those scenery spots are located in the downtown areas of the
194 194 194 194
cities. Therefore, the high-gain antenna with narrow horizontal lobe angle and wide
vertical lobe angle is a favorable choice for such scenery spots.
Internal Model of
Manufacturer
Type
Frequency
range
(MHz)
Gain
(dBd/dBi)
Angle
(C)
Horizonta
l Lobe
800-10251
45 Diversity
Panel
1710-2170 19.8 Adjustable 35
AP21-1940/030D/AD
T/XP
45 Diversity
Panel
1710-2170 20.7 Adjustable 30
UMWD-03319-2D
45 Diversity
Panel
1900-2170 18.2/20.3 2 31
DB992HG28N-B
Vertical
polarization
Flat Panel
2170-2490 14.9/17 0 25
742-186
45 Diversity
Panel
1710-2170 20.2 0 63
UMWD-06516-0D
45 Diversity
Panel
1900-2170 16/18.1 0 65
UMWD-06517-0D
45 Diversity
Panel
1900-2170 17.2/19.3 0 63
UXM-1710-2100-65-
15.5i-0-D
45 Diversity
Panel
1710-2170 15 0 65
7.29 Type Library of WCDMA Antennae
7.29.1 Collection of WCDMA Outdoor Omni Antennae
1. Code: (To Be Determined) Antenna Manufacturer: KATHREIN
Product Number: HXS-201-60-1.9-6-2GHz-6
0

Electrical Specifications
Frequency Range 1920 MHz ~ 2170 MHZ
Gain 11.6 dBi
Horizontal 3dB Beamwidth 360
Vertical 3dB Beamwidth 6-8

195 195 195 195
Impedance 50
VSWR < 1.54
Maximum Input Power 100 W
Connector 7/16NID-F
IM.3rdOrder(2 43dBm) <-150dBc
Lightning Protection Direct Ground
Mechanical Specifications
Dimensions (D L) 60 1500 mm
Weight of Antenna 3.8kg
Weight of Mounting Kits 1.3kg
Diameter of Installation Pole 50 mm ~ 110 mm
Radome Material Fiberglass
Rated Wind Velocity 241 km/h
2. Code (To Be Determined) Antenna Manufacturer: GCI Science & Technology
Product Number: TQJ-2000-11-3G
Frequency Range 1920 MHz ~ 2170MHZ
Gain 11 dBi
Vertical 3dB Beamwidth 6-8
Impedance 50
VSWR < 1.5
Connector 7/16NID-F
IM.3rdOrder (2 43 dBm) < -150dBc
196 196 196 196
Lightning Protection Direct Ground
Dimensions (D L) 60 1500 mm
Weight of Mounting Kits 1.3kg
Diameter of Installation Pole 50 mm ~ 110 mm
3. Code (To Be Determined) Antenna Manufacturer: Mobile Antenna Technologies
(Shenzhen) MB3G-0A-11
Product Number: DB909E-U
Gain 11 dBi
Vertical 3dB Beamwidth 8
Main beam angle 0 ~ 1.5
Impedance 50
VSWR < 1.4
IM.3rdOrder (2 43dBm) < -150dBc
Connector 7/16NID-F
Dimensions of antenna (D L) 58 1870mm
197 197 197 197
Diameter of Installation Pole 50 mm ~110mm
Rated Wind Velocity 45m/s
Color White
4. Code (To Be Determined) Antenna Manufacturer: ANDREW
Product Number: DB909E-U
Gain 11 dBi
Vertical 3dB Beamwidth 7
Impedance 50
VSWR < 1.5
IM.3rdOrder (2 43dBm) < -150dBc
Connector 7/16NID-F
Lightning Protection DC grounding
Dimensions (D L) 50.8 1397 mm
Weight of Antenna 1.6 kg
Diameter of Installation Pole 50 mm ~110 mm
Color Light grey
198 198 198 198
7.29.2 Collection of WCDMA Outdoor Directional Antennae
1. Code: 53140085 Antenna Manufacturer: KATHREIN
Product Number: UMWD-06516-2DM
Electrical specifications
Frequency Range 1920-2170 MHz
Gain co-polar 17.5 0.5dBi
Horizontal 3dB beamwidth 65
Vertical 3dB beamwidth 6.5
Front-back ratio > 28dB
Polarization +45, -45
Isolation > 30dB
Impedance 50
Electric downtilt > 12
VSWR < 1.5
Maximum input power 300W
Connector 2 7/16NID-F
Mechanical specifications
Dimensions 1371 177 88mm
Wind load 101/499(lbf/N)
2. Code: 53140085 Antenna Manufacturer: Celwave (Shenzhen Centurydragon as
Agency)
Product Number: Apx206515(Celwave)
Gain co-polar 17.7dBi
Vertical 3dB beamwidth >6

199 199 199 199
Front-back ratio >28dB
Isolation >30dB
Impedance 50
VSWR < 1.5
Connector 2 7/16NID - F
IM.3rd order (2 43dBm) < -160dBc
Lightning protection DC grounding
Dimensions (L W H) 1360 mm 169 mm 80 mm
Weight of antenn 8.0kg
Diameter of installation pole 50~110 mm
Radome material UV Resistant Fibre Glass
Rated wind speed 55.6m/s
3. Code: 53140085 Antenna Manufacturer: KATHREIN (Qiancheng Technologies
as Agency)
Product Number: TDJS-2000-18-H65-3G
Frequency Range 1920 ~ 2170 MHz
Gain co-polar 18 dBi
Horizontal 3 dB beamwidth 65
Vertical 3 dB beamwidth 7
Front-back ratio > 25 dB
Cross-polar discrimination >20dB

200 200 200 200
Isolation > 28dB
Impedance 50
VSWR < 1.5
Connector 2 7/16NID - F
IM.3rd order (2x43dBm) <-150dBc
Lightning protection DC grounding
Dimensions (L W H) 1300 mm 160 mm 75 mm
Weight of antenna 4.5 kg
Weight of mounting kits 3.5 kg
Diameter of installation pole 50 ~ 110 mm
Radome material UPVC
Horizontal 360
Angle of pitch 0 ~ -15
Rated wind speed 241 Km/h
7.29.3 Collection of WCDMA Indoor Omni Antennae
1. Code: 53140182 Antenna Manufacturer: GCI
Science & Technology
Product Number: TDJ-DF
Technical Specifications:
Frequency Range 824-960&1700-2200 MHz
Gain 3 dBi
Input power 50 W
Nominal Impedance 50

201 201 201 201
VSWR < 1.5
Connection mode
Standard Termination N-50F
Height (mm) high (mm) 62
Diameter 200 mm
Weight 500 g
2. Code: 53140128 Antenna Manufacturer: Mobile Antenna Technologies
(Shenzhen)
Product Number: MB5F-0A-3/5-C
Frequency Range (MHz) 800-2400
Gain (dBi) 3(824-960MHz)
5(1710-2170MHz)
VSWR < 1.4
Impedance () 50
Connection Type N(F)
Radiating Element Material Copper
Radome material ABS
Radome Color White
Dimensions of antenna
Dimension(mm) 160 85
Packing Size(mm) 180 180 155
Weight (Kg) 0.4
Operating Temperature(C) -40 ~ +70

202 202 202 202
Reposition Temperature(C) -55 ~ +50
3. Code: 53140128 Antenna Manufacturer: Shenglu Antenna of Sanshui
Product Number: TQJ-SA800/2200-3
Technical Specifications:
Frequency Range 806-960&1710-2170 MHz
Gain 3 dBi
Input power 50 W
Nominal Impedance 50
VSWR < 1.5
Connection mode Standard Termination N-50F
Material Ultraviolet radiation protection ABS
Dimensions 168 80 mm
Weight 490 g
7.29.4 Collection of WCDMA Indoor Directional Antennae
1. Code: 53140126 Antenna Manufacturer: GCI Science & Technology
Product Number: TDG - 2000-9-H65-3G
Gain 9 dBi
Vertical 3dB beamwidth 46 5
Front-back ratio > 15dB
Impedance 50
VSWR < 1.5

203 203 203 203
Input power 50 W
Connector N-F
IM.3rd order <-150dBc
Dimensions of antenna 220mm 173mm 44mm
Radome material Fire-resistant ABS
2. Code: 53140126 Antenna Manufacturer: Mobile Antenna Technologies
(Shenzhen)
Product Number: MB5F-70/40-9/6-W
Frequency Range(MHz) 824-2200
Gain (dBi) 9(824-960MHz)
6((1710-2170MHz)
VSWR < 1.4
Horizontal-3dB Beamwith 70(824-960MHz)
40 (1710-2170MHz)
Polarzation Vertical
Impedance () 50
Connection Type N(F)
Radiating Element Material Copper
Radome Material ABS
Radome Color White
Dimensions (mm) 240 220 65
Packing Size (mm) 260 270 80
Weight (Kg) 1.5

204 204 204 204
Mounting Type Plug-in
Operating Temperature (C) -40 ~ +70
Reposition Temperature (C) -55 ~ +50
2. Code: 53140126 Antenna Manufacturer: Shenglu Antenna of Sanshui
Product Number: TDG - 2000-9-H65-3G
Frequency Range 824~960MHz 1710-2170 MHz
Gain 7 dBi
Polarization Linear polorization
Impedance 50
VSWR < 1.7
Input power 50 W
Connector N - F
IM.3rd order (2 43dBm) <-150dBc
Dimensions of antenna 210mm 180mm 44mm
Radome material Ultraviolet radiation protection ABS
7.30 Antenna Installation Specifications
Knowledge Point
This chapter introduces the installation and debugging methods for BS antenna, as well
as points for attention.
7.31 Antenna Installation
Antenna installation is of two types, pole installation and tower installation. Pole
installation is to install the antenna on the top of buildings or walls in the streets in

205 205 205 205
urban areas. Please note the two installation modes.
7.31.1 Pole Installation
1. Pole is the basis to install antennae. Whether the pole is vertical or not
influences the adjustment of antenna direction and angle.
The inclined pole due to problems in pole itself or installation directly affects the
declination angle accuracy of the directional antenna and the receiving effects of
the omni antenna. Therefore, the very first thing is to ensure the pole for
installing antenna is straight. Plumb could be applied to make sure the antenna is
vertical to the ground. The declination angle of the directional antenna should be
measured by the inclination tester. Mechanical inclination should include pole
engineering inclination and bending.
Whether the pole is straight is vital to the network performance in planning and
optimization. However, checking the straightness of the antenna installation is
usually neglected.
2. The antenna is always installed 10cm above the top of the pole to firmly fix the
antenna onto the pole. The anchor ear around the antenna does not fall off, the
inclination could be adjusted easily, and the electric discharge is running
normally.
7.31.2 Tower Installation Mode
In actual installation, when using the boom whose distance away from the tower
platform is longer than 1M to set the antenna, the vertical separation between different
platform is 1M.
In general, please note the following when installing antenna on the tower:
1. Installation at the directional antenna tower: To reduce the influence by the
antenna tower to the antenna pattern, the maximum directivity outside the tower
can be obtained when the distance from the center of the antenna to the tower is
/4 or 3/4.
2. Installation at the omni antenna tower: To reduce the influence by the antenna
tower to the antenna pattern, the antenna tower must not be taken as the reflector
for the antenna. Thus, the antenna should be installed on the edge angle, and the
minimum distance from the antenna to any part of the tower is bigger than .
206 206 206 206
3 Multi-antenna on the same tower: To reduce the coupling effects and
interactions of receiving and transmitting antenna from different networks, and
enlarge the isolation between each antenna, the best solution is to enlarge the
distance between each antenna. Vertical installation should be employed when
multi-antenna share the same tower.
7.32 BS Antenna Structure and Connection
Take a 3-sector BS for example to describe the installation procedures of the BS
antenna system.
1. Amount of related components:
1) Six patches of BS antennae
2) If the system configuration includes tower amplifier, then six tower amplifiers
are needed.
3) Jumpers from the antenna to the main feeder. Appropriate length should be
chosen. Six jumpers are needed.
4) Main feeder
5) Lightning arrester. Every feeder should be equipped with one lightning arrester.
Six lightning arresters are needed.
6) Jumpers from the main feeder to the cabinet. Appropriate length should be
chosen. Six jumpers are needed.
2. There is one feeder connecting each set of BS antenna to the cabinet top. For
configurations without tower amplifiers, from the antenna to the cabinet, each
feeder includes the following:
1) 1/2 super flexible jumper from the antenna to the main feeder (If there is the
tower amplifier, this jumper is the one that goes from the antenna to the tower
amplifier, then to the main feeder. The connectors are male DIN connectors.
2) The main feeder is a 7/8 feeder, with a length from several meters to hundreds of
meters. The connectors for jumpers between the antenna and the main feeder
and those between the main feeder and the cabinet top are female DIN
connectors.
207 207 207 207
3) There is a lightning arrester between the main feeder and jumpers on the cabinet
top. The lightning arrester should be connected to ground. The connectors are
DIN connectors, with the male connectors connecting the main feeder, and the
female connectors connecting the jumpers.
4) The jumper between the main feeder and the cabinet top is the 1/2 super flexible
jumper. The connectors are male DIN connectors.
5) Before the feeder goes into the equipment room, the grounding kits should be
installed onto the upper and lower parts of the main feeder. If the feeder is
longer than 60m, grounding kits should be installed in the main feeder.
6) For configurations with tower amplifier, jumpers also include those from the
antenna to the tower amplifier and from the tower amplifier to the main feeder.
3. Many other accessories are also used in the installation of the BS antenna,
including:
1) Outdoor grounding kit (with 7/8 main feeder).
2) Indoor grounding kit (with 7/8 main feeder).
3) Indoor grounding kit (with 1/2 main feeder)
4) Outdoor grounding window (12 or 22 holes)
5) Triple feeder fixing card (with 7/8 main feeder)
6) Feeder feeds through (with 7/8 main feeder).
7) Indoor grounding copper busbar (with 7/8 main feeder).
8) Indoor cable rack and its accessories
For the connection of the BS antenna system, please refer to Fig. 7.32-1.
208 208 208 208

Fig. 7.32-1 Installation of the BS Antenna System
7.33 BS Antenna Installation
7.33.1 Considerations
1. To ensure safety for the BS equipment, the following requirements should be
fulfilled:
1) The tower in the BS is fixed on the ground. The feeder should be grounded well
on the platform of the tower top, between 0.5 and 1 m above the point where the
feeder bends away from the tower, and outside the entrance to the equipment
room. The center of the feeder should be grounded when it is longer than
60m.The metal sheath of the feeder is connected to the grounding copper busbar
through grounding kit. Connect a tin-plated copper line or hot zinc-plated flat
steel whose cross-sectional area is no less than 95m
2
from the busbar to the
corresponding reserved hole in the tower.
209 209 209 209
2) Install the antenna with pole. Each pole should be connected to the lightning
arrester area. Anticorrosion preparations should be done for the grounding
connections.
3) The main feeder should be strengthened every 1.2m, while the bends should be
further enhanced when necessary. After the installation of the feeders, the holes
for feeders to enter the equipment room should be sealed up well in order to
prevent rain water from seeping into the equipment room.
4) The antennas, feeders, tower, and equipment in the equipment room should all
be grounded well. The working grounding of each BS should form a combined
grounding system with the grounding resistance less than 1 .Feeders should be
grounded respectively at the connections to the antenna, bends away from the
tower, and outside the entrance to the equipment room; and one more time after
entering the equipment room.
2. System requirements of the antenna installation:
1) Isolation between each antenna. The isolation should be at least larger than 30dB
between two transmitting antennas, and between the transmitting and the
receiving antenna.
2) To achieve a certain diversity gain, diversity distance should be implemented to
the receiving antennas.
3) There should not be no serious distortion to the antenna pattern due to
reflections of the obstacles and barriers around the antenna.
4) Multi-antenna on the same tower: To reduce the coupling effects and
interactions of receiving and transmitting antenna from different networks, and
enlarge the isolation between each antenna, the best solution is to enlarge the
distance between each antenna. Vertical installation should be employed when
multi-antenna share the same tower.
7.33.2 Outdoor Directional Antenna Installation
Installation procedure for installing the BS antenna:
1. Following the order in Figure 4.2 (a), (b), respectively install the antenna
declination angle fixed racks to corresponding positions on the antenna. Frap the
racks to make them folded.
210 210 210 210
2. Make sure the input/output ports of the antenna are facing downwards. Adjust
the antenna to the right height. Fix the antenna declination angle fixed racks to
the antenna pole with the screw bolt and U bolt.
3. Use the compass to figure out the differential angle between the direction of the
antenna radiant surface and the north, and also the south. Work out the angle
between adjacent antenna radiant directions according to the differential angle of
the antennas in adjacent sectors. Turn the antenna around the pole to adjust the
angle between adjacent antennas as required.
The angle between antennas in different sectors for deployment is 120.The
antennas in the same sector should point to the same direction.
4. Use the antenna declination angle fixed racks to adjust the antenna angle of
direction, and adjust the antenna declination angle to the right position. The
antenna declination angle should be as same as the indications on the antenna
declination angle fixed racks. The errors should not exceed 1.
5. Fix the screws in Fig. 7.33-1(a), (b) with the spanner.

(a) (b)
Fig. 7.33-1
211 211 211 211
Note: To reduce the influence by the antenna tower to the antenna pattern, the
maximum directivity outside the tower can be obtained when the distance from the
center of the antenna to the tower is /4 or 3/4.
7.33.3 Outdoor Omni Antenna Installation
The installation of the omni antenna is simpler. As long as the verticality could be
ensured and it is firmly installed, it will be fine. Other steps are as the same as those for
the directional antenna, as shown in Fig. 7.33-2 (1), (2).

Fig. 7.33-2 Outdoor Omni Antenna Installation
Note: To reduce the influence by the antenna tower to the antenna pattern, the antenna
tower must not be taken as the reflector for the antenna. Thus, the antenna should be
installed on the edge angle, and the minimum distance from the antenna to any part of
the tower is bigger than .
7.33.4 Indoor Antenna Installation
1. Take the MB5F-0A-3/5-C of Mobile Antenna Technologies (Shenzhen) for
212 212 212 212
example to illustrate the installation procedures for omni ceiling-mount indoor
antenna.
1) Find out the position on the ceiling to install the antenna, and drill a hole with
the diameter as 17~18mm with the electrical drill.
2) Open the antenna packing. Take off the cab of the cable connector and loosen
the chuck. Insert the cable connector into the hole in the ceiling and put it
through. Spin the chuck into the cable connector and fix it. Screw up the cable
connectors of the BS with the antenna cable connector, as shown in Fig. 7.33-3
(1), (2), and (3):

Fig. 7.33-3 Omni Ceiling-Mount Indoor Antenna Installation (1)
2. Take the TDG-2000-9-H65-3G of GCI Science & Technology for example to
illustrate the installation procedures for directional wall-mount indoor antenna.
As shown in Fig. 7.33-4, fix the support plate into the wall with three wood
screws, then insert the antenna into the support plate as illustrated in the figure.
(If a pitch angle is needed, bend the support plate correspondingly) Connect a 50
coaxial cable.
213 213 213 213
3-M4x8
screw
Wall
Wall-mount
antenna
Support
plate

Fig. 7.33-4 Directional Wall-Mount Indoor Antenna Installation
7.33.5 Jumper Installation
7.33.5.1 Principle
The installation of the feeder system for the BS antenna requires jumpers from
receiving/transmitting antenna to the main feeder and from the cabinet top to the main
feeder. If the antenna feeder system is configured with tower amplifier, there will be
more jumpers needed. The number of jumpers includes connection jumpers from the
antenna to the tower amplifier and jumpers from the tower amplifier to the main feeder,
as shown in Fig. 7.33-5:

Fig. 7.33-5 Jumper Installation1/2
7.33.5.2 Installation Procedure
1. Choose an appropriate jumper route. Consider reliability and convenience and
try to make it as short as possible. Choose appropriate length for the jumper.
2. Connect the connectors of the antenna and the jumper based on appropriate
214 214 214 214
moment, and make sure there is no side stress on the connectors of the antenna
and jumper.
3. Connect the connectors of the main feeder and the jumper based on appropriate
moment, and make sure there is no side stress on the connectors of the main
feeder and jumper.
4. Fix the jumper with the hanger in a distance of no longer than 0.76m.
5. Seal the connectors with 3M single-coated foam and PVC adhesive tape upon
correct measure of the antenna and feeder.
7.33.5.3 Precautions
Note the following when installing 1/2 super flexible jumper to avoid influence of the
reliability of the BS antenna system.
1. The minimum bending radius is 32mm for one-time bending.
2. The minimum bending radius is 32mm for repetitive bending. At least it could
be bent 20 times. The nominal value is 50 times.
3. The maximum pulling force is 80KGk, the maximum bending moment 2.7NM,
and the maximum impact strength 1.8KG/M.
4. The maximum hanger separation is 0.76m.
7.33.6 Lightning Arrester Installation
7.33.6.1 Principles
All the cables led by the antenna to the equipment room must be connected in parallel
with a lightning arrester to the grounding cable, thus when the over-voltage wave
created by the landed lightning in distance attacks the system along the cables, the
lightning arrester can divert the over-voltage wave to the ground and jam all the
channels to prevent lightning current attack.
/4 stub tuner is a type of typical lightning arrester instrument. It is similar to the
parallel connection of an infinite impedance. Its great attenuation to the lightning
enables the destructive energy to be diverted to the ground while there is no impact on
the equipment, as shown in Fig. 7.33-6.
215 215 215 215

Fig. 7.33-6 Lightning Arrester
1. The lightning arrester is usually installed between the 7/8 main feeder and the 1/2
cabinet top jumper after the main feeder enters the equipment room. There are
two DIN connectors for the lightning arrestor, with the connectors on both sides
being female.
2 Check whether the working frequency of the lightning arrester is the same as
that of the BS system. The frequency is indicated on the lightning arrester.
3. The grounding post of the lightning arrester should be connected to the main
grounding post or system grounding cable loop to ensure the impedance to the
ground is as small as possible.
4. Do not seal the connectors before the feeder performance test. Seal them with
single-coated foam upon correct installation and test.
7.33.6.3 Precautions
1. There are two Radio Frequency (RF) ports. Each RF port can be connected to
either the antenna or the BS. The same lightning protection is provided by the
lightning arrester. However, the RF port cannot be exposed outdoor for any use.
2. The grounding post of the lightning arrester should be connected to the main
grounding post or system grounding cable loop to ensure the impedance to the
216 216 216 216
ground is as small as possible.
3. In installation, all the grounding contact surface should be clean, dry and
inoxidized.
7.33.7 Grounding kit Installation
7.33.7.1 Principle
The grounding kit is used for connecting conductors outside the feeder and tower frame
or separated conducting wire post to provide channels for current to the ground in case
of thunder and lightning. Usually, the grounding kits should be installed at the top of
the feeder near the BS antenna, at the vertical part of the feeder end, and before the
feeder entering the equipment room. For feeders longer than 60m, the center of the
feeder should be connected with grounding kits, as shown in Fig. 7.33-7.

Fig. 7.33-7 Grounding kit
1. Connect the fixing piece of the grounding kit and the main feeder:
1) Connect the fixing piece of the grounding kit to the 7/8 feeder. Mark at the
corresponding installation position on the 7/8 feeder. Install the corresponding
sheath for the 57mm 7/8 feeder.
2) Prepare a section of 38mm water-proof adhesive tape. Wrap the tape on the
grounding cable at Grounding kit B.(See Fig. 7.33-7)
3) Cover the outer conductor of the feeder with the coupling piece for grounding
and tighten fixing piece.
217 217 217 217
4) Make sure the fixing piece is over the little bulge on the side of the coupling
piece, and press firmly on the fixing piece of the grounding kit towards the
feeder to let the water-proof adhesive tape take shape.
5) Wrap the whole connection with the water-proof adhesive tape from the lower
part of the connection.
6) Wrap five layers of electrical insulating adhesive tape around the whole
connection in half-lap covering mode, with each layer 25mm higher than the
previous.
2. Connect the grounding end of the grounding kit and the grounding system:
1) When connecting the grounding terminal to the grounding cable, cover the cable
with shrinking bushing and grounding fastener. Press the shrinking bushing.
Heat around the shrinking bushing to improve shrinking effects. The shrinking
bushing cannot be put on flat areas of the grounding terminal.
2) Connect the grounding terminal with the tower body or special grounding post.
Clear up the paint and oxide within a radius of about 13mm around the
connection. Coat the clean area with anti-oxidation cream to ensure good
electrical contact.
Warning
Installation of grounding kits is forbidden in case of thunder storm. Neglect of this
warning may cause harm or even life danger to yourself or others.
7.34 Antenna Feeder System Debugging
7.34.1 Prerequisites
1. Antenna testing aims to check whether the antenna system is installed correctly
and able to run normally. The testing includes antennas, feeders and jumpers.
2. The installation of antennas, feeders and jumpers should be completed. The
antenna and the tower amplifier are disconnected.
3. The test should be well organized. Please avoid repeated connection and
disconnection of connectors and sealing components. Do not seal connectors
before the test finishes.
218 218 218 218
7.34.2 Debugging Procedure
1. Check whether the Connect the antenna and the feeder is correct.
2. Check whether the feeder and connectors are damaged, and connectors are
connected correctly.
3. Use the compass to figure out the differential angle between the direction of the
antenna radiant surface and the north. Work out the angle between adjacent
antenna radiant directions according to the differential angle of the antennas in
adjacent sectors. If the network planning requirements are not met, antennas
should be adjusted.
4. Test the feeder insertion loss, measure the antenna feeder reflection coefficient
and the antenna feeder system standing wave ratio (usually less than 1.5). If the
network planning requirements are not met, connections of each connector
should be checked.
7.35 Connector Sealing
Seal the connecting connectors upon a passed test of the antenna feeder system. Two
kinds of adhesive tapes are employed, water-proof adhesive tape and electrical
insulating adhesive tape. First wrap with the water-proof adhesive tape, and then put
electrical insulating adhesive tape over it.
Note
3M Scotch Super33+ electrical insulating adhesive tape is fire-retardant, frost resisting
and corrosion resistant. It is applicable for use under 600V. The temperature should not
exceed 80C.

219 219 219 219
8 WCDMA Radio Network Optimization
Process and Technology
Radio network optimization means to improve the coverage, capacity, QoS and
resource utilization of the network through appropriate adjustment of radio
communication network planning and design and to operate the network in a more
reliable and economical way.
8.1 Service Consideration of Network Optimization
We all knows, a wonderful network comes from fluent requirements, deliberate
planning, well-controlled process and continuous optimization.
Coverage
capability
Network
capacity
Operator's revenue
Operation
cost
QoS

Fig. 8.1-1 Service Consideration of Network Optimization
8.2 Reasons for Network Optimization
Network optimization is needed when any of the following events occurs:
When the network quality cannot satisfy the planning and design requirements
(mostly at the initial phase of network construction)

220 220 220 220
When the network environment changes, for example, the voice and data
subscribers keep increasing to cause deterioration of the existing network
performance or the urban environment keeps changing to cause regional
coverage differences of the network, the network originally designed will be
unable to adapt to the new environment requirements and thus the network will
need to be optimized and adjusted. In this case, suggestions on the subsequent
capacity expansion of the network shall also be put forward.
8.3 Types of Network Optimization
The objectives of network optimization vary with the different phases of UMTS
network construction. By the implementation period, objectives and steps of
optimization, network optimization can be divided into engineering optimization and
O&M optimization.
8.3.1 Engineering Optimization
Engineering optimization refers to the network optimization performed after the
network is constructed but before subscriber numbers are allocated. Its major purpose
is to enable the network to successfully run and ensure the planned network coverage
and interference targets.
Engineering optimization involves the following jobs:
Check the consistency between cell configurations and the network planning
targets
Troubleshoot system hardware faults
Achieve a satisfactory level of coverage and interference
8.3.2 O&M Optimization
O&M optimization is intended to improve the network quality and to enhance the
customer satisfaction by optimization means during the network operation.
Firstly, the expectations of O&M Optimiztion are:
1. Improve the network coverage and gradually eliminate coverage blind-spots
2. Improve the system capacity
221 221 221 221
3. Improve the QoS of the network
4. Provide more high-quality service for the hot-spots
5. Maximize the return on investment
Secondly and finally, O&M optimization covers the following three jobs:
1) Routine maintenance
Routine maintenance refers to routine alarm information observation,
troubleshooting of hidden faults, handling of subscriber complaints and so on,
which is the fundamental responsibility of the operator.
2) Phased optimization
It aims to improve the network performance, which includes, minimizing
interferences, improving the network capacity and optimizing system parameters
so that the network KPIs will reach a better level.
3) Network operation analysis
It means to analyze the possible equipment troubles or network problems by
periodically extracting and analyzing OMC performance statistics data and to
submit the Operation Analysis Report on the Network in XX Service Area to
provide a reference for adjusting and optimizing the Customers network.
8.4 Optimization Workflow
The following figure illustrates the WCDMA radio network optimization flow:

222 222 222 222
Start
Network data collection
Data analysis
Does the network
performance satisfy
the requirements?
Optimization
solution preparation
End
NO
YES
^_^
Preparatory work
Optimization project
acceptance
Document archiving
Network
assessment report
Optimization &
adjustment plan
Optimization &
adjustment records
Network
optimization report
Frequency spectrum scanning
Calibration test
Optimization effect
verification
Emulation/
planning report
Optimization solution
implementation
Optimization
project plan
Parameter check
Problem location

Note: The steps not mandatory for each network optimization are indicated in red and may be tailored to the specific onsite situation.
Fig. 8.4-1 WCDMA Radio Network Optimization Flow Chart
The network optimization flow covers the following steps: Preparation (optional),
223 223 223 223
frequency spectrum scanning (optional), calibration testing (optional), network data
collection, data analysis, parameter checking (optional), problem location, optimization
solution preparation, optimization solution implementation, optimization effect
verification, optimization project acceptance and document archiving.
Note:
The above figure shows the complete network optimization flow and the steps may be
tailored appropriately according to the actual scale of the network, the network
conditions and the Customers requirements. If frequency scanning and calibration test
have been done during the planning period, they may be omitted during the
optimization. In addition, parameter check is needed only when it is regarded as
necessary through network data analysis.
8.5 Optimization Steps
8.5.1 Preparation
The following preparatory work should be done before the formal optimization:
1. Requirement analysis
Requirement analysis shall be based on the full and effective communication
with the Customer and the following things shall be confirmed through it:
1) The Customers requirements for network optimization targets, including the
specific requirements for the coverage, capacity and QoS of the network
2) The responsibility division interface between us and the Customer
3) The project acceptance time and criteria
2. Work plan formulation
The work plan shall be made on the basis of the specific network scale, human
and equipment resources, the Customers requirements for network optimization
targets and other relevant conditions. The Optimization Project Plan for the
WCDMA Radio Network in XX Service Area shall be output for it. The plan
shall cover the staff composition of the network optimization project, the
planned optimization means and the optimization progress schedule.
A complete work plan is the guarantee to smooth deployment of network

224 224 224 224
optimization and can be used to monitor the progress of optimization.
3. Data collection and investigation
The following documents and data shall be collected before network optimization:
1) Emulation Report on the WCDMA Radio Network in XXX Service Area and
Planning Report on the WCDMA Radio Network in XX Service Area in the
network planning phase.
2) Planned network site information, antenna feeder information, system parameter
settings and other relevant information.
3) Existing problems of the current network.
4. Preparation of optimization tools
1) The driving test tools are the basic tools for network optimization tests. They
include the driving test software, test UEs, receiver and GPS. Some driving test
devices may also require dual serial port cards.
2) A signaling analyzer may be needed to implement signaling tracing and location.
If interference test is needed, a frequency spectrum meter and other relevant
equipment may need to be prepared. In addition, a compass and other relevant
equipment may be needed if engineering parameters are to be adjusted.
8.5.2 Frequency Spectrum Scanning (Optional)
Scan the frequency currently used by the network in the optimization area with consent
of the Customer, so as to confirm that the frequency is clean and available for use.
8.5.3 Calibration Test (Optional)
The calibration test covers the following test items:
1. Vehicle-mounted antenna calibration test
2. Calibration test of the external antenna of the test UE
3. Average penetration loss test of the vehicle
Conduct the above tests in the static condition. You can use multiple test UEs at
the same time to make call tests inside the car, from the external antenna of the
test UEs to the top of the car and at the normal conversation positions in the
225 225 225 225
passages outside the car. Record the receiving power of these UEs and average
them to get the loss of different environments relative to the environment inside
the car.
4. Building penetration loss test
Test the building penetration loss with the same method as described above, and
compare the indoor receiving power with the outdoor receiving power to get the
penetration loss value. In getting the loss value, you should average the
receiving power of multiple test points.
8.5.4 Network Data Collection
The network data needed for optimization generally come from driving test (DT) data,
CQT data, OMC performance measurement data, user complaints, alarm data and other
relevant data.
Because the network assessment data can be compared only in the same load condition
and the same call mode, you must clarify the parameter selection for network data
collection first.
1. Load selection
The load for network assessment test falls into three cases: In the busy hour,
when there is load and when there is no load (or when there is only light load).
1) The busy-hour test refers to the network assessment test done in the busy hour of
the current network. It needs to measure the traffic of each Node B during the
test through the background measurement system. The network assessment data
in different service areas can be compared only in similar load conditions. The
busy-hour test generally applies to networks that have been formally put into
operation for a period of time.
2) The loaded test is used to simulate the network performance when there are
plenty of subscribers in the network by adding simulated loads in the uplink and
the downlink (the simulated load method applies to the engineering optimization
phase). The downlink load adopts the OCNS mode and the uplink load is
implemented by connecting the transmitting end of the UE to the attenuator. The
loaded test can be conducted at a normal time for networks without large-scale
number allocation but can only be conducted at the midnight when there is very

226 226 226 226
little traffic for networks that have completed large-scale subscriber number
allocation, so as to accurately simulate the load and reduce the impact of the test
on subscribers in the actual network. In addition, the OCNS mode applied to the
downlink load can only reflect the radio network performance rather than the
processing capability of the system. Preferably the load of the uplink shall be
implemented by connecting a noise simulator to the receiving end of the Node B,
but it is hard to equip all Node Bs with a noise simulator. Therefore, the load of
the uplink shall be implemented by connecting the transmitting end of the UE to
the attenuator.
3) The unloaded (or light load) test is a network assessment test conducted when
there are no subscribers or there are only few subscribers in the network. The
unloaded test can be conducted at a normal time for networks without
large-scale number allocation but can only be conducted at the midnight when
there is very little traffic for networks that have completed large-scale number
allocation, so as to accurately reflect the radio performance of the network,
facilitate the comparison with the loaded test to discover if the problems in the
network are caused by the load, and reduce the impact of the test on subscribers
in the actual network.
The busy-hour test is generally adopted for networks that have completed
large-scale subscriber number allocation and have been formally put into
operation while the unloaded or loaded test is generally adopted for networks
newly constructed.
2. Call mode
By call time, the call mode may fall into continuous long calls and periodic
calls.
1) The continuous long call test means to originate calls for continuous tests in the
coverage area and automatically re-attempt the call if a call drops by setting the
call hold time to the maximum value. This test can be used to test network
performance parameters such as call drop ratio, handover success ratio,
handover cell ratio and data service rate.
2) The periodic call test is used to periodically originate calls to test network
performance by setting the call setup time, the call hold time and the call
227 227 227 227
gapping to a group of fixed values. It can better reflect the processing capability
of the system and can be used to test network performance parameters such as
call completion ratio and call drop ratio.
The major difference between the above two call modes lies in the call hold time: The
continuous long call test shall have a call hold time as long as possible while the periodic
call test shall have a fixed hold time (depending on the specific situation).
In addition, the periodic call test relates to more calls and can better reflect the processing
capability of the system. Its test results are more approximate to the actual use situation of
subscribers. In contrast, the continuous long call test can better reflect the handover
performance of the system.
8.5.4.1 Driving Test (DT) Data
The driving test items of the CS domain service include the coverage ratio, call success
ratio, call drop ratio, conversation quality and handover success ratio, whereas those of
the PS domain service include the PDP Context activation success ratio and the average
uplink/downlink transmission rate.
1. The driving test refers to the process of moving in the specified paths in the
coverage area and using driving test equipment to record all test data and
location information.
2. The driving test data shall cover the following information: Pilot Power, Ec/Io,
UE Tx Power, Neighbours, Call Success/Drops, and HandOver statistics,
Service allocation and FER/BLER.
3. The driving test equipment includes the scanner, test UE, test software ZCPOS
CNT1 (UMTS Edition), portable test PC and GPS. Sometimes some auxiliary
equipment such as the USB expander, vehicle-mounted power inverter and
terminal plate may be needed. The signal receiver and test UE among the
driving test equipment can both collect network data and they slightly differ
from each other.
1) Scanner
The scanner is used to collect complete radio network information and provide
functions such as pilot analysis test and frequency spectrum analysis test.
2) Test UE

228 228 228 228
The test UE is used to learn the use condition of actual network subscribers and
collect the downlink information of the network. It completes the following
functions:
UE measurement data collection: Pilot Power, Ec/Io, UE Tx Power, Neighbour
cells, RSS, FER/BLER, etc.
Call type event and performance statistics: Call drop ratio, blocking ratio, call
success ratio, handover success ratio, voice QoS, data service rate statistics, etc.
Collection of air interface signaling: L3 message decoding for access, paging,
synchronization and uplink/downlink service
4. The following principles shall be observed during the driving test:
1) The WCDMA system is a self-interference system and the DT result varies with
the specific network load condition. Therefore, please confirm the network load
before the driving test.
2) Test time
Choose the appropriate test time according to the load condition of the network.
The busy-hour test generally applies to networks that have been formally put
into operation for a period of time. The busy-hour driving test is usually
conducted at the most busy time of the network, that is, from Monday to Friday
during non-holiday periods and the busy hour from 9:00 to 10:00 everyday.
For networks without large-scale subscriber number allocation, the loaded
driving test can be conducted at a normal time, such as the time period from
9:00 to 21:00 everyday.
For networks that have completed large-scale subscriber number allocation, the
loaded driving test can only be conducted at the midnight when there is very
little traffic, such as the time period from 0:00 to 5:00 everyday, so as to
accurately simulate the loads and reduce the impact of the test on subscribers in
the actual network.
For networks without large-scale subscriber number allocation, the unloaded
driving test can be conducted at a normal time, such as the time period from
9:00 to 21:00 everyday.
229 229 229 229
For networks that have completed large-scale subscriber number allocation, the
unloaded driving test can only be conducted at the midnight when there is very
little traffic, such as the time period from 0:00 to 5:00 everyday, so as to
accurately reflect the radio performance of the network, facilitate the
comparison with the loaded test to discover if the problems in the network are
caused by the load, and reduce the impact of the test on subscribers in the actual
network.
Without taking the traffic situation into consideration, generally the test of a
very big city shall last for eight hours, that of a big city shall last for six hours
and that of a medium-sized city shall last for four hours.
Note:
Try to cover the service areas specified in the network plan while ensuring the test
duration.
3) Test routes
Before the driving test, the test routes must be planned first and the test range is
the areas that should be covered by the network in this phase of project. The test
routes must cover: a} important urban places such as the densely-populated
areas of the city center, major backbone roads of the city, living area, banks of
the river and roadways; b} important roads, areas with a large passenger flow
and important areas such as tourist spots; and c} express highways, national
highways, provincial highways and other important roads (including roads in the
important countryside). If conditions permit, it may also include railways and
waterways. It shall cover the whole service area as much as possible.
By the area of the test routes, the driving test may fall into the urban driving test
and the main road driving test.
The urban driving test routes shall cover: a) important urban places such as the
densely-populated areas of the city center, major backbone roads of the city,
living area, banks of the river and roadways; and b) areas with a large passenger
flow and important areas such as tourist spots.
The main road driving test routes shall cover express highways, national
highways, provincial highways and other important roads (including roads in the
important countryside). It may also cover railways and waterways upon the

230 230 230 230
Customers request.
The driving test routes of the CS domain service may be the same as those of the
PS domain service, or the test routes of the PS domain service may be adjusted
upon the Customers request.
Note:
Not all optimization belongs to network-wide optimization. The network-wide test may
be spared for local optimization.
4) Please follow the requirements below during selection of the test routes:
The driving test routes should be radial and circular routes.
A radial route can reflect the relationship of signal quality to change with
changes of the Node B distance.
A circular route can be used to predict signal quality of the Node B in different
directions.
During the optimization test, generally three test routes should be defined for
each Node B cluster. Please keep consistency of the test routes before and after
the optimization.

Fig. 8.5-1 Selection of the Test Routes
5) The consistency of the driving test condition shall be ensured before and after
the optimization.
The process of network optimization can be simply summarized as follows:
Network performance test -> Network optimization and adjustment -> Conduct
231 231 231 231
the network performance test again to assess the effect of optimization.
Obviously, it is very important to keep consistency of the test condition before
and after the optimization.
The following factors may cause inconsistency of the test condition before and
after the optimization:
Different test tools (including parameter settings) are used before and after the
optimization
Different antennas or antenna feeders (not calibrated) are used before and after
the optimization
Different analysis staffs process the data before and after the optimization
Different test routes are selected before and after the optimization
The moving speed of the UE along the test routes varies before and after the
optimization
The network load level differs before and after the optimization, which will have
influence on the Ec/Io
Inconsistent test time periods
The following measures can be taken pertinently to ensure consistency of the test
condition before and after the optimization:
Try to use the same test tool and adopt the same parameter setting before and
after the optimization
Use the same test antennas and antenna feeders before and after the optimization
Ensure that the same analysis staff processes the data before and after the
optimization
Use the same test routes before and after the optimization
Select the sampling by distance rather than sampling by time for the data
sampling mode so as to ensure consistency of the UEs moving speed. If the
driving test tools cannot be implemented with the sampling mode by distance,
try pausing data collection when the red lamp is lit
Check if the tested area is ongoing with the load test and ensure that the test is
conducted in the same time period on the day, so as to obtain basically the same

232 232 232 232
network load condition
Conduct the test in the same time period
4. CS domain service
For the driving test of the CS domain service, one network load condition out of
the busy-hour test, the loaded test and the unloaded test may be selected upon
the Customers request, and the continuous long call test or the periodic call test
may be appropriately chosen according to the Customers request.
For the urban driving test, generally periodic calls are recommended (to test
such indexes as the cal completion ratio and the call drop ratio), considering that
the vehicle moving speed is slow, there are quite many Node Bs and the network
performance largely varies with the specific area. The call setup time, call hold
time and call gapping (idle time) are 10 seconds, 60 seconds and 5 seconds by
default, but they can be adjusted upon the Customers request.
For the main road driving test, generally continuous long calls are recommended
(to better reflect the handover performance of the network) so as to ensure the
continuity and integrity of data since the vehicle moves rather fast. If necessary,
periodic calls may also be adopted for the main road driving test.
5. PS domain service
The PS domain service test is generally done at an idle time, that is, the driving
test of the PS domain service is done when the network has no load or only has a
light load. The purpose of completing the test at an idle time is to avoid the
incomparability of test data of different areas caused by uneven distribution of
subscribers or avoid the influence of the driving test of the PS domain service on
normal use of voice subscribers in the network. The network load for the driving
test of the PS domain service may also be chosen upon the Customers request.
The driving test of the PS domain service shall be performed in the areas with
important requirements for data services. The test routes in these areas shall be
as minute as possible. For the other areas with possible requirements for data
services, the important roads shall be tested.
The driving test items of the PS domain service shall include the following:
Attachment success ratio, PDP Context activation success ratio, average
233 233 233 233
activation time of the PDP Context, communication interruption ratio, average
downlink transmission rate and average uplink transmission rate.
The pilot signals on the test routes shall be so good as to originate calls for the
PS domain service. In addition, the test items can be counted simultaneously in
one operation, for example, we can count the number of PDP Context activation
successes in an operation and then count the number of communication
interruptions and the time needed for each PDP Context activation.
6. Characteristics of driving test data
They include geographical location information
The test result is restricted to a certain extent due to restrictions of the selected
test routes
8.5.4.2 Call Quality Test (CQT) Data
1. Dial calls at the fixed location, record the data at the test location and dial
multiple calls at each test point. The fixed-point CQT test includes the CS
domain service CQT and the PS domain service CQT. The specific test content
is related to the Customers requirements and depends on the actual situation.
2. The following principles shall be observed during the CQT:
1) Test time
In principle, the CQT test shall be conducted from 9:00 to 10:00 everyday from
Monday to Friday during non-holiday periods.
2) Test point selection
The following factors shall be comprehensively taken into account during the
selection of a test point:
The traffic of the area where the test point is located. Generally, a place with
large traffic is selected for networks that have been formally put into operation.
The geographical factors of the area where the test point is located. 80% of the
test points shall be indoor while 20% outdoor. In addition, the test points shall be
evenly distributed in terms of geographical distribution.
Note:
85% of the test points shall be indoor: The selected test points must be the

234 234 234 234
indoor test points with a coverage plan prepared and actual conversation
requirements.
Radio environment of the area where the test point is located. The places
installed with a repeater or an indoor distribution system shall be preferred as
the test points.
Areas where network problems possibly exist. The places that may possibly be
blind spots, such as the streets between high-rise buildings or places located in a
multi-carrier area, shall be selected as the test points.
3) Precautions on selection of test points
80% of the test points shall be indoor while 20% of the test points shall be
outdoor.
The indoor test points shall cover important places of the city, such as star hotels,
terminals of airports, waiting rooms of railway stations, long-distance bus
stations, metro stations, port docks, top-grade residential communities,
governmental departments, operators office buildings and business halls, large
shopping marts/restaurants/entertainment places, top-grade office buildings,
exhibition centers and important urban tourist spots. For places such as airports,
railway stations, star hotels, large shopping marts, top-grade office buildings and
port docks, their public places are generally selected as test points: Airport
terminals, waiting rooms of railway stations, halls of hotels, meeting centers,
restaurants, entertainment centers, underground parking lots, top-layer guest
rooms and port docks. When conducting the test inside a high-rise building,
make five MO (Mobile-Originated) calls on the first floor (including two MO
calls in the underground parking lot), five MO calls on the top floor and 10 MT
(Mobile-Terminated) calls on the intermediate floors. The other test points shall
be evenly distributed after the geographical and traffic factors are
comprehensively taken into account, and the test shall focus on the important
areas.
Residential areas at the coverage border and streets between high-rise buildings
shall also be included in the outdoor test points. In addition, the tourist spots
shall be covered.
235 235 235 235
Note:
A three-star hotel is an important place for a small- or medium-sized city;
therefore, all three-star hotels shall be selected as mandatory test points.
Generally, at least 60 test points shall be selected for a very big city, 40 for a big
city, 30 for a medium-sized city and 20 for a small city.
The specific test points shall be selected in accordance with the above principles
and the actual situation of the project. They shall be stated in the submitted
report. The selection of test points for the PS domain service may differ from
that of the CS domain service, or some test points with qualified signals may be
chosen for the PS domain service test, in addition to the test points selected for
the CS domain service test.
3. CS domain service
The CQT test items of the CS domain service include the coverage ratio, call
success ratio, call drop ratio, poor conversation quality ratio and average call
delay.
Record parameters of the UE such as downlink receiving power (RxPower),
RSCP and Ec/Io with the related test software. Record the number of MOC
successes, MTC successes, failures and call drop times. Get the number of calls
with poor conversation quality through subjective feeling and evaluation. And
record the delay of each call with the test software.
The data of all test points are used to count the coverage ratio. However, to
count the call success ratio, call drop ratio, poor conversation quality ratio and
average call delay, you must select the test points whose receiving power
(RxPower) is equal to or larger than 95 dBm and whose Ec/Io is equal to or
larger than 14 dB (the thresholds of Ec/Io and RSCP may differ with the
specific service, that is, the pilot signal should be so good as to originate calls
for the service to be tested), because these parameters are significant only when
the coverage is ensured.
4. PS domain service
The CQT test items of the PS domain service shall include the following:
Attachment success ratio, PDP Context activation success ratio, average
activation time of the PDP Context, communication interruption ratio, average

236 236 236 236
downlink transmission rate and average uplink transmission rate.
The pilot signals on the test routes shall be so good as to originate calls for the
PS domain service. In addition, the test items can be counted simultaneously in
one operation, for example, we can count the number of PDP Context activation
successes in an operation and then count the number of communication
interruptions and the time needed for each PDP Context activation.
5. Characteristics of the CQT data
They include geographical location information
The test result is restricted to a certain extent due to restrictions of the selected
test points
8.5.4.3 OMC Performance Measurement Data
1. The OMC performance measurement data extraction method applies to
networks that have been put into large-scale commercial application. The
measurement data are objective and abundant, reflecting the running quality of
the whole network statistically. The network performance indices thus obtained
can serve as the most essential reference for assessing the network performance.
2. Extraction of OMC performance measurement data
The counter values needed for calculating the network KPI can be flexibly
extracted and counted according to different statistical range. Statistical
performance reports can be customized according to the Customers
requirements.
3. Characteristics of OMC performance measurement data
The background NMS indicates the running quality of the network it manages
from the plenty of sampling data statistics.
The statistical range flexibly varies. Some use the RNC as the statistical unit
while others logically use the Cell as the statistical unit.
A variety of network performance index counters are provided.
8.5.4.4 Subscriber Complaint Information
As the end users of network services, common subscribers are most directly sensitive
237 237 237 237
to network performance. The problems complained by subscribers must be solved as
soon as possible. The subscriber complaint information has the following
characteristics:
It most directly reflects the shortcomings of the network
It contains specific geographical location information in most cases
The complained faults are generally about poor signal coverage, difficulty in
making calls and call drop
8.5.4.5 Alarm Information
Alarm information refers to the alarm information of the RNC, Node B, and CN
background NMS. It is a centralized embodiment of the abnormalities or near
abnormalities during the equipment use or network running.
Caution:
Give an eye to and check the alarm information during the network optimization period,
so as to timely discover pre-alert information or the problems that have occurred and
thus avoid the occurrence of accidents.
8.5.4.6 Other Data
In addition to the data listed previously, generally there are the data obtained through
the signaling analysis system, the network traffic test system, the voice quality
assessment system and other systems. These are specialized data used to help accurate
location of network problems.
8.5.5 Data Analysis
Data analysis means to understand the running quality of the network through analysis
of the driving test data, CQT data, OMC performance measurement data, subscriber
complaint information, alarm information and other data, so as to assess the
performance of the network.
Different data analysis methods shall be taken for different means to obtain the network
data, as described below.
8.5.5.1 Driving Test Data Analysis
Driving test data analysis means to make geographical analysis, table analysis,

238 238 238 238
graphical analysis, custom event analysis and statistical analysis of the network data
collected by the signal receiver and the test UE.
Through it, the following major network indices can be obtained:
Coverage ratio, call success ratio, call drop ratio, conversation quality and
handover success ratio for the CS domain service
PDP Context activation success ratio and average uplink/downlink transmission
rate for the PS domain service
We can combine these indices and test conditions for analysis to basically learn the
coverage loopholes, interference, pilot pollution and other information of the network.
Geographical analysis
Through geographical analysis, we can vividly view the signal intensity and
quality, Node B distribution, cell coverage, interference, pilot pollution and
other information of the current network. Generally, the pilot signal intensity Ec
distribution map, pilot signal quality Ec/Io distribution map, pilot pollution map
and other maps of the signal Node B, the Node B cluster and the whole network
should be formulated. In addition, a comparison of the effect before and after the
optimization must be made.

239 239 239 239
Fig. 8.5-2 Geographical Analysis Window
Table analysis
The table shows the values of all parameters in a data table. They can be
browsed, searched and analyzed.

Fig. 8.5-3 Table Analysis Window
Graphical analysis
Graphical analysis means to describe the two-dimensional features of a
parameter in a curve diagram. At present, there are two types of analysis:
Common curve diagram analysis and PDF curve diagram analysis.
1) Common curve diagram analysis describes the features of a parameter in a
two-dimensional curve diagram.

240 240 240 240

Fig. 8.5-4 Common Curve Diagram Analysis Window
2) PDF curve diagram analysis is probability distribution curve analysis

Fig. 8.5-5 PDF Curve Diagram Analysis Window
241 241 241 241
For an area with high call drop ratio (or poor service quality), the data playback, query
and statistics functions provided by the specialized optimization analysis software
ZXPOS CNA1 (UMTS Edition) may be used to make a further analysis.
Custom event analysis
Custom event analysis mans to judge the status of an event via the interface
provided by the analysis software CNA1 to users by setting the logic conditions
between messages. It can be used to query the events you are interested in.

Fig. 8.5-6 Custom Event Analysis Window
Statistical analysis
Statistical analysis includes statistical analysis of the original test data in the
specified time period and that of the original test data in the specified area. It can
be used to count the number of test points and scale of a parameter item and
display the result in the form of a diagram (bar chart or pie chart) or table. The
following figure shows the statistical setting of RxPower:

242 242 242 242

Fig. 8.5-7 Original Data Statistics Setting Page
Rx Power
0
0. 79
8. 61
28. 98
47. 55
14. 07
0
0. 79
9. 4
38. 38
85. 93
100
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
( - I NF,
- 100]
( - 100,
- 90]
( - 90,
- 80]
( - 80,
- 70]
( - 70,
- 60]
( - 60,
+I NF)
Range
P
e
r
c
e
n
t
i
l
e
(
%
)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
Per cent i l e( %)
Cumul at i ve Per cent i l e( %)

Fig. 8.5-8 Bar Chart Formed According to the Statistical Result
8.5.5.2 CQT Data Analysis
Analyze the CQT test data with the specialized network optimization analysis software
ZXPOS CNA1 (UMTS Edition).
Let us take delay analysis for example. The Delay Analysis page in the message
243 243 243 243
analysis window is illustrated in the following figure.

Fig. 8.5-9 Message Analysis Window Delay Analysis
The analysis items related to the CQT data also include call event analysis, custom
event analysis, geographical event analysis, geographical delay analysis and statistical
item analysis.
The CQT test data analysis result includes call success ratio, call drop ratio, call delay,
conversation quality and average data service rate. From these data, we can learn the
indoor coverage and interference condition of the network in the selected area.
1) Call success ratio
Call success ratio = [Number of successful calls/total number of calls] 100%
2) Call drop ratio
Call drop ratio = [Number of dropped calls/total number of successful calls]
100%
Note:
If continuous long calls are adopted, the total number of successful calls is equal to the
total call duration (in seconds) divided by 90 seconds.
3) Average call delay

244 244 244 244
It refers to the average delay measured with the WCDMA network optimization
analysis software ZXPOS CNA1. It is the interval from the time when the
calling UE receives the Alerting signaling directly sent from the CN to the time
when the calling UE sends the first RRC Connection Request.
Note:
The random access delay may vary greatly due to the different radio environment
quality caused by different network loads. Therefore, the average call delay is
measured on the basis of the network load.
4) Average data service rate
Count the PDP Context activation success ratio and the average uplink/downlink
transmission rate of all test points with the WCDMA network optimization
analysis software ZXPOS CNA1, so as to get the PDP Context activation
success ratio and the average uplink/downlink transmission rate of the network.
8.5.5.3 OMC Performance Measurement Data Analysis
OMC performance measurement data analysis can be used to obtain the general
performance indexes (GPIs) and the key performance indexes (KPIs) of the radio
network, which are an important reference for assessing the network performance.
Through analysis of the OMC performance measurement data, we can directly locate
the range of area where a problem occurred and thus help accurate location of the
problem.
The resource utilization is indicated by these indexes: Worst cell ratio, super busy cell
ratio, super idle cell ratio and cell code resource availability.
The indexes obtained from the OMC also include those that can reflect the running
quality of the network: Access success ratio, call completion ratio, call drop ratio and
call delay.
These indexes reflect the handover performance of the system (handover success ratio):
Softer handover success ratio, soft handover success ratio, Inter-Iur soft handover
success ratio, hard handover success ratio and inter-system handover success ratio.
Note:
Handover is an important part of system mobility management and handover success
245 245 245 245
ratios are also important indexes of the system mobility management function.
WCDMA handover falls into softer handover, soft handover and hard handover. Softer
handover occurs to different cells in the same Node B; soft handover falls into soft
handover between Node Bs in the same RNC and that between different RNCs (with
the Iur interface involved). Softer handover and soft handover both belong to
intra-frequency handover. Hard handover falls into co-frequency hard handover,
inter-frequency hard handover and inter-system handover. The co-frequency hard
handover occurs between different RNCs (without involving the Iur interface).
Listed below are several KPIs:
1 Worst cell ratio
Description:
A worst cell refers to a cell whose call drop ratio is more than a% or service congestion
ratio is more than b% in a certain traffic condition. The worst cell ratio refers to the
percentage of worst cells to the total number of available cells of the system.
Calculation formula:
Worst cell ratio = Total number of worst cells / total number of available cells * 100%
The total number of worst cells refers to the number of cells whose call drop ratio is
more than a% or service congestion ratio is more than b%, where a% and b% are
determined by the configuration. The total number of available cells refers to the
number of available cells in the current system.
2 Super busy cell ratio
Description:
A super busy cell refers to a cell whose carrier transmit power utilization ratio is more
than c%. The super busy cell ratio refers to the percentage of super busy cells to the
total number of cells.
Super busy cell ratio = Total number of super busy cells / total number of available
cells * 100%
The total number of super busy cells refers to the number of cells whose carrier
transmit power utilization ratio is more than c%. Here, c% is determined by the

246 246 246 246
configuration. The total number of available cells refers to the number of available
cells in the current system. The RNC can count the average value of carrier transmit
power of a single cell of the Node B by receiving measurement reports from the Node
B. The utilization ratio of carrier transmit power can be obtained after the maximum
value of carrier transmit power is divided by the average value of carrier transmit
power.
3 Cell code resource availability
Description:
The downlink scramble set (main scrambles) of the WCDMA system is restricted to
512 scrambles and each cell is allocated a main scramble. A main scramble of a cell
corresponds to a spreading code tree (binary tree) and each level of the code tree
defines a channel code whose length is the spreading factor (SF). The SF value ranges
from 4 to 256. A main scramble is used to identify a cell and a downlink channel code
is used to identify a subscriber in the cell. The feature of this spreading code tree is that
the occupation of a node will cause blocking of all the sub-code tree nodes and the
higher-layer nodes directly connected to it.
The cell code resource availability indicates the ratio of unallocated code resources on
the current code tree to all the code resources on the current code tree. It can accurately
reflect the code resource status of the current cell.
Cell code resource availability = 1- (the number of codes allocated by the SF to 4-code
nodes/4 + the number of codes allocated by the SF to 8-code nodes/8 + the number of
codes allocated by the SF to 16-code nodes/16 + the number of codes allocated by the
SF to 32-code nodes/32 + the number of codes allocated by the SF to 64-code nodes/64
+ the number of codes allocated by the SF to 128-code nodes/128, the number of codes
allocated by the SF to 256-code nodes/256 + the number of codes allocated by the SF
to 512-code nodes/512) * 100%
The characteristics of the spreading code tree shall be taken into account when
counting the current number of available cell codes. When a certain node is occupied,
all its sub-nodes will not be available any longer and therefore they shall not be
counted into the available codes.
247 247 247 247
4 Soft handover success ratio
Description:
Soft handover takes place between different Node Bs and the diversity signals are
selectively merged in the RNC. The soft handover success ratio reflects the mobility
performance of the system and can be sensed indirectly by subscribers. Here, the
inter-Iur soft handover is not considered. Instead, the inter-Iur soft handover success
ratio is independently assessed as an index.
Calculation formula (two are available):
Soft handover success ratio 1 = (the number of times to successfully add a radio link
during soft handover + the number of times to successfully delete a radio link during
soft handover) / (the number of attempts to add a radio link during soft handover + the
number of attempts to delete a radio link during soft handover) * 100%
Soft handover success ratio 2 = (ActiveUpdateComplete times / ActiveUpdate times *
100%
5 Softer handover success ratio
Description:
Softer handover takes place between cells of the same Node B and the diversity signals
are merged at the maximum gain ratio in the Node B. It reflects the mobility
performance of the system and can be indirectly sensed by subscribers.
Softer handover success ratio = Softer handover success times / softer handover
attempts * 100%
6 Access success ratio
Description:
The access success ratio (RRC connection setup success ratio) reflects the capability of
a radio network to admit UEs, and RRC connection setup success means that the UE
has established a signaling connection with the network. This index is also an
important index to measure the call completion ratio and is included in the call
completion ratio. It affects the call success ratio and is a performance index that can be
directly sensed by subscribers.

248 248 248 248
Many reasons may cause an RRC connection setup request, including UE-initiated
RRC connection setup requests due to cell selection, cell reselection, call and location
updating. In general, only the access success ratio due to call reasons will be counted.
Because non-call access and call access have slight difference, the access success ratio
here does not differentiate the causes of the RRC connection setup request.
The access success ratio is expressed by the ratio of RRC connection setup success
times to the total RRC connection setup attempts, whose signaling messages are the
UE-initiated RRC CONNECTION REQ times and the RRC CONNECTION SETUP
COMPLETE times in turn.
Access success ratio = RRC connection setup success times / RRC connection setup
attempts * 100%
Here, the influence from retransmission shall also be considered.
7 RAB establishment success ratio
Description:
RRC connection setup success means that the UE has established a signaling
connection with the network and is the first step of establishing a call connection,
whereas RAB establishment success means that a user plane connection has been
successfully allocated to the subscriber (RAB refers to the bearing of the user plan and
is used to transmit voice, data and multimedia services between the UE and the CN),
and is the last step of establishing a call connection.
The RAB establishment success ratio is a performance index that can be directly
sensed by subscribers. It falls into the RAB establishment success ratio of the CS
domain and that of the PS domain, and can be further divided according to the specific
services.
The RAB establishment success ratio is expressed by the ratio of RAB assignment
success times to RAB assignment attempts, whose signaling messages are RAB
ASSIGNMENT REQUEST (RAB establishment) and RAB ASSIGNMENT
RESPONSE (RAB establishment success) in turn.
249 249 249 249
RAB establishment success ratio of the CS domain = RAB assignment success times of
the CS domain / RAB assignment attempts of the CS domain * 100%
RAB establishment success ratio of the PS domain = RAB assignment success times of
the PS domain / RAB assignment attempts of the PS domain * 100%
RAB establishment success ratio = (RAB assignment success times of the CS domain
+ RAB assignment success times of the PS domain) / (RAB assignment attempts of the
CS domain + RAB assignment attempts of the PS domain) * 100%
8 Call drop ratio
Description:
The call drop ratio reflects the communication hold capability, stability and reliability
of the system. It is an important performance index of the radio communication system.
It directly relates to psychological feeling and use confidence of subscribers.
The radio system call drop ratio only takes into account the dropped calls caused by
abnormalities of the access side rather than those caused by abnormalities of the CN
side or the forced call drop processing taken by the load control process in radio
resource management in the case of overload.
In addition, we suppose that the CN will send a RAB assignment release command. In
practice, the CN may directly send the Iu interface signaling connection release
command without sending the RAB assignment release command.
When call drop occurs, the system may trigger one of the two signaling procedures:
One is the RAB release request and the other is the Iu interface signaling connection
release request. The radio system call drop ratio falls into the call drop ratio of the CS
domain and that of the PS domain. In the DT and CQT test content as we previously
described, the call drop ratio of the PS domain is also called the communication
interruption ratio, so as to differentiate itself from the call drop ratio of the CS domain.
Call drop ratio of the CS domain = (RAB release requests of the CS domain + Iu
interface signaling connection release requests of the CS domain) / RAB assignment
success times of the CS domain * 100%
Call drop ratio of the PS domain = (RAB release requests of the PS domain + Iu
interface signaling connection release requests of the PS domain) / RAB assignment

250 250 250 250
success times of the PS domain * 100%
Radio subsystem call drop ratio = (RAB release requests of the CS domain + Iu
interface signaling connection release requests of the CS domain + RAB release
requests of the PS domain + Iu interface signaling connection release requests of the
PS domain) / (RAB assignment success times of the CS domain + RAB assignment
success times of the PS domain) * 100%
9 Call delay
Description:
The call delay reflects the systems speed to respond to service calls and it directly
relates to the psychological feeling and use confidence of subscribers. It can fall into
the average call delay of the CS domain and the average PDP Context activation time
of the PS domain, and may be further divided according to the specific services. To
count the call delay, authentication and TMSI reallocation functions must be enabled
first and whether to calculate the ciphering time shall depend on the specific service
needs.
The average call delay of the CS domain falls into the call delay from UE to UE and
that from UE to PSTN.
Average call delay of the CS domain = {the time when the calling UE receives the
Alerting signaling message directly sent from the CN the time for the calling UE to
start sending the first RRC Connect Request} / the number of UE calls
Average PDP Context activation time of the PS domain = {the time when the UE
receives the DT (Active PDP Context Accept) signaling message the time when the
UE sends the DT (Active PDP Context Request) signaling message} / the number of
UE calls
8.5.5.4 Subscriber Complaint Information Analysis
Because of diversity of subscribers descriptions of problems and difference of their
expressions in the subscriber complaint information, the problem may often relate to
the transmission system, the charging system and other relevant systems, in addition to
the Node B. Therefore, we should carefully identify and find the information that can
251 251 251 251
really reflect the network status.
The subscriber complaints may directly indicate the symptoms and geographical
location of a problem. The following information can be obtained through
reorganization of them:
Places with poor network coverage
Places with low call success ratios
Places with high call drop ratios
Places with poor voice signal quality
8.5.5.5 Alarm Information Analysis
Alarm information contains plenty of abnormal pre-alert information during the
network running and can help us quickly locate problems and find out the way to solve
them. When the network performance deteriorates due to occurrence of a certain fault,
the OMC performance measurement indexes will often be abnormal. Therefore, it will
be of great help to network fault location and removal if we can find out the correlation
between OMC performance measurement indexes and the relevant alarm information.
If we determine from the alarm information that the Node B is problematic (such as
VSWR alarm), then we need to check the problematic Node B and troubleshoot its
equipment faults.
8.5.5.6 Analysis of Other Data
Some network problems are caused by poor radio network coverage or poor signal
quality (for example, there are many causes for soft handover failure). In that case, the
above-mentioned analysis methods would be unable to locate the faults and it is then
necessary to analyze the specific data.
For example, we can trace the signaling of various interfaces such as Uu, Iub and Iur,
count the signaling traffic and messages at each interface and find out the exceptional
signaling procedures; and combine the other statistical data to more accurately locate
the faults and discover the exceptions that can be hardly discovered at usual times, so
as to eliminate hidden troubles.
Below is an example of decoding analysis of the air interface signaling by use of the
ZXPOS CNA1:

252 252 252 252
The list of messages collected by the test software ZXPOS CNT1 is illustrated in the
following figure:

Fig. 8.5-10 Air Interface Message List Window
The lower half of the window as shown in the above figure is the message decoding
subwindow. It shows the decoding results of the selected system message and parses
the content of each system information block according to the system information
block stream in the system message. For the system information blocks transmitted
segment by segment, it will assemble the segmented system information block streams
into a complete information block stream during the parse, decode the complete
information block stream and then display it.
During message analysis, the message filter condition can be set so that you can
conveniently get the needed information, as shown in the figure below:
253 253 253 253

Fig. 8.5-11 Message Analysis Window - Setup Log Mask (Message Filter Setting)
1 Common Analysis Methods
Discussed above are the analysis methods for different data acquisition means. In
addition to these analysis methods, some other analysis methods are available during
the optimization:
Multi-dimensional analysis, tendency analysis, accident analysis, comparative analysis,
rank analysis and cause & impact analysis.
Multi-dimensional analysis
A dimension refers to the focus and direction of solving a problem.
Multi-dimensional analysis is to analyze data from multiple different angles and
their combinations.
For example, we shall focus on access, handover and other relevant issues in
addition to call drop when dealing with a call drop problem.
Tendency analysis
Tendency analysis is to analyze the tendency of changes with the time in the
time sequence to find its law, as shown in the following figure:

254 254 254 254

Fig. 8.5-12 Tendency Curve of Changes of the Call Drop Ratio with Time
Accident analysis
Accident analysis is to find out the exceptional data such as excessive high
index, excessively low index and excessive large change amplitude among the
bulky data, and further mine data on the impact causes, as shown in the
following figure:

The call drop ratio is abnormally high and it is necessary to find if any problem occurs to this time period
Fig. 8.5-13 High Call Drop Ratio and Time Period Statistics
Comparative analysis
255 255 255 255
Comparative analysis means to compare different data sets from the same angle,
so as to find the differences and further explore the causes of differences. This
method is often applied in signaling procedure analysis.
Rank analysis
Rank analysis means to find out the Top N or Bottom N data by a certain
classification method from the bulky data. These data shall deserve special
attention. An example of rank analysis is the common worst cell method.
Cause and impact analysis
Cause and impact analysis means to mine the impact factors from the bulky data
for a certain result generated and analyze the importance of different factors or
their combinations.
Note:
Every analysis method is effective for certain problems and has certain restrictions. To
locate a specific equipment problem, parameter configuration problem (including
engineering parameters and radio parameters) or radio resource utilization problem, a
single analysis method can hardly work and you must appropriately combine the
above-mentioned methods.
Through data analysis, we should learn the basic conditions of the network such as
coverage and interference, the operation performance & quality such as access success
ratio, call drop ratio and handover success ratio of the network, and the network
resource utilization such as worst cell ratio and cell code resource availability.
Network Assessment
First summarize the network tests and analysis done previously and output the
Assessment Report on the WCDMA Radio Network in XX Service Area.
Note:
The network assessment report is mandatory at the initial stage of the optimization but
is not required after the optimization, because the network optimization report to be
output after the network optimization and adjustment already contains an assessment of
the network performance after the optimization.
The comprehensive score of network assessment can be obtained after the DT score,

256 256 256 256
the CQT score and the OMC index score are weighted and summated.
Comprehensive score of the network = DT score * 40% + CQT score * 30% + OMC
index score * 30%
Note:
If the relevant performance data cannot be obtained from the OMC, for example, for
the network assessment before subscriber number allocation, the comprehensive score
of the network may simply be obtained through calculation of the DT score and the
CQT score:
Comprehensive score of the network = DT score * 60% + CQT score * 40%
The network assessment is used to discover the problems existing in the network, guide
the next step of network optimization and facilitate a comparison of the network
performance before and after the network optimization.
8.5.6 Parameter Check (Optional)
Disqualified indexes of the network can be discovered during data analysis. If it is
found that some parameters are improperly configured and affect the network
performance, you must check the parameter configuration data of the problematic
Node B. The check shall cover these contents:
1. Check the single site
Check if the site is in the correct position, if the antennas used are of the correct
model, if the mounting height, azimuth and down tilt of the antennas are
consistent with the plan, and if the antenna feeders used are of the correct model
and have appropriate lengths; test the VSWR of the antenna feeders, and check
the other aspects.
2. Check if the cell radio configuration parameters are consistent with the planned
values
A cell is generally represented by the following parameters: Frequency,
scramble and common physical channel configurations.
The common physical channels include the Primary Common Pilot Channel
(PCPICH), the primary synchronization channel (PSCH), the secondary
257 257 257 257
synchronization channel (SSCH), Primary Common Control Physical Channel
(PCCPCH), the Packet Random Access Channel (PRACH), the Secondary
Common Control Physical Channel (SCCPCH), the access indication channel
(AICH) and the paging indication channel (PICH). Please check if the transmit
power of these channels is set to the planned values.
3. Check the relevant service configuration parameters of voice services and data
services.
8.5.7 Problem Localization
8.5.7.1 Types of Network Problems
Radio network problems occur in the following aspects: Equipment software and
hardware, engineering parameters, radio parameters, network capacity and others.
1. Equipment software and hardware problems
Equipment problems include software version problems, Node B board
problems, antenna feeder quality problems and others.
The network problems that may be caused by equipment problems include the
following: No signal coverage in the planned area, failure of service initiation
though there is signal, failure of inter-Iur handover (due to RNC software
version problems), and others.
2. Engineering parameter problems
These problems refer to improper engineering parameter settings, such as the
position, mounting height, down tilt and azimuth of the antennas. The main
network problems thus caused include poor network coverage, severe
interference, severe pilot pollution, call drop and low handover success ratio.
3. Radio parameter problems
There are many network radio parameters: Paging and registration, access, load
and admission control, handover, power control, cell reselection parameters and
the adjacent cell list. Improper radio parameter configuration may cause the
following network problems: Network access failure of the UE, low call
completion ratio, call drop, handover problems and others.
4. Network capacity

258 258 258 258
The network load increases as the number of subscribers increases. Due to the
self-interference feature of the WCDMA system, the network performance and
the QoS will decrease. In this case, it is necessary to expand the network
capacity.
Note:
The localization of network problems is a complex process that requires you to
combine the test and statistical data by using different analysis means.
8.5.7.2 Problems and Related Influence
1. Equipment software and hardware
For hardware faults, usually there is alarm information at the background, such
as the antenna feeder VSWR alarm and the low power alarm. Some hardware
faults without any alarm can also be located through network data analysis. The
occurrence of an equipment fault will cause poor performance indices of a single
Node B or a Node B cluster.
2. Network engineering parameters
These parameters include the azimuth, down tilt, mounting height and position
of the antennas. To handle the coverage and interference problems during the
network optimization after the network construction is completed but before the
number allocation, you can adjust the network engineering parameters.
1) Coverage
Generally, the pilot signal strength is used to indicate the network coverage
conditions: The pilot strength received by 95% of the coverage areas shall be
greater than 89dBm (densely-populated urban areas) or 94dBm (urban areas).
The pilot signal quality is used to indicate the interference conditions: The pilot
Ec/Io measured in 95% of the coverage areas shall be greater than 10dB.
To locate a coverage problem:
Determine the coverage blind spots by analyzing the driving test data.
Evaluate the severity of these coverage blind spots and sort these spots in the
priority sequence.
259 259 259 259
2) Interference
To locate an interference problem:
Determine the areas where the pilot Ec/Io is lower than the threshold.
Check the pilot level of these areas (these areas may probably have more than
three pilot signals).
Find any unexpected pilot (such pilot signals come from the cells that are not
designed to provide coverage for these areas) from the pilots received by these
areas.
Network coverage and interference problems will cause KPIs such as call
success ratio, call drop ratio, access delay and handover success ratio to fail to
meet the requirements.
3. Radio parameters of the network
Radio parameters of the network are involved in both engineering optimization
and O&M optimization. One of the main tasks of O&M optimization is to
improve the network KPIs. This includes adjusting the access parameters,
paging parameters, power control parameters, handover parameters, search
parameters and other parameters.
1) Adjacent cell list
Due to the self interference feature of the WCDMA system, any strong signal
not in the adjacent set will cause strong interference to the current serving cell,
resulting in such problems as low call completion ratio, poor voice quality, high
call drop ratio, or failure to initiate high-speed services (the most frequent
problem is call loss caused by missing adjacent cell configuration). Do not
forget to put the adjacent cells with the best signal into the adjacent cell list.
Precautions related to adjacent cell list optimization:
The network planning tools can automatically plan the adjacent cell list by use
of a proper algorithm. Generally, the algorithm is based on the interference
among cells.
If the pilot signal of a certain cell is quite strong but the cell is not added to the
active set, then the signal of the cell becomes a very strong interference source.

260 260 260 260
The adjacent cells can be configured unidirectionally or bidirectionally.
The following should be considered first during the setting of the adjacent cell
list: The interference generated by the cell and the possibility of becoming the
main serving cell of the UE.
2) Call parameters
Counter T300 indicates the call wait time and counter N300 indicates the
retransmission count. They are closely related to the call success ratio.
3) Handover parameters
The handover in the WCDMA system is divided into the following three types
according to the types of source cell and destination cell: Intra-frequency
handover, inter-frequency handover and inter-system handover. The following
text discusses several parameters affecting intra-frequency handover.
1A event: The signal of a primary CPICH enters the reporting range. Reporting
Range Constant and Hysteresis are important parameters used to judge whether
to trigger the 1A event. They affect the judgment threshold and hysteresis range
of the 1A event.
1B event: The signal of a primary CPICH goes out of the reporting range.
Reporting Range Constant and Hysteresis are important parameters used to
judge whether to trigger the 1B event. They affect the judgment threshold and
hysteresis range of the 1B event.
The 1C event takes place when the signal quality of a cell (cell1) in the
monitoring set is better than that of the worst cell (cell2) in the active set.
Hysteresis is the preference margin of the cell in the active set when the 1C
event is triggered.
The 1D event means changes have occurred to the best cell. Hysteresis is the
preference margin of the cell in the active set when the 1D event is triggered.
4) Inter-system handover
Subscriber access problems:
In the hybrid network of 2G and 3G, the dual-mode UE selects the 2G network
once being powered on and hence cannot access the 3G network. For some UEs,
261 261 261 261
you may solve the problem by locking the frequency and the network. However,
calls may get lost when the UE reaches the coverage edge of the 3G network.
5) Inner loop power control
For the uplink, first the Node B measures the SIR of each radio link received,
and then compares it with the target SIR (SIRtarget) needed for the service. If
SIR is equal to or larger than SIRtarget, then the Node B sends a Transmitted
Power Control (TPC) command with a bit value being 0 to the UE through the
downlink control channel to request the UE to reduce its transmit power. If SIR
is less than SIRtarget, then the Node B sends a TPC command with a bit value
being 1 to the UE through the downlink control channel to request the UE to
increase its transmit power. Then the UE judges whether to increase or decrease
its transmit power according to the received TPC command and the power
control algorithm specified by the network layer. The adjustment step is
TPC_STEP_SIZE. This operating mechanism also applies to the downlink.
The inner loop power control algorithm and the power control step are important
factors affecting the power control effect.
4. Adjustment after capacity analysis or traffic grooming analysis
The fine areas in a city only account for a very small proportion of the
coverage area but can account for 80% of the total planned capacity. They are
the construction focus of the Customers WCDMA radio network and the major
source of the Customers future revenues. If the network capacity cannot be well
expanded to satisfy the huge upgrade requirements of these fine areas, the
Customer would suffer a big loss.
The following measures may be adopted: Adding Node Bs, using multiple
carriers, splitting cells, using microcell Node Bs and RF remote stations, and
others.
8.5.8 Formulation of the Optimization Plan
After the network problem is located, generally there is a set (or several sets) of
solutions available. You need to make the best optimization adjustment plan based on
the specific site conditions, and output the Optimization & Adjustment Plan for the
WCDMA Radio Network in XX Service Area. For different network problems,
different optimization & adjustment plans can be adopted:

262 262 262 262
1. Adjustment strategy of equipment software and hardware problems
If software problems are found during parameter check, you need to timely
confirm the software version and update the software. Equipment hardware
problems often lie in board faults and you should replace the faulty boards then.
2. Adjustment strategy of engineering parameters
You may improve the network coverage and reduce the interference by adjusting
the azimuth, down tilt, mounting height and position of the antennas.
Caution:
Pay attention to the impact of the strategies on the coverage of the original serving area
of the cell.
However, to reduce the interference, it is far from enough to only adjust the
engineering parameters. You may also need to adjust other parameters (for example,
the transmit power of common channels of the cell).
3. Adjustment strategy of radio parameters
1) Adjacent cell list adjustment
Solve the possible problem of missing adjacent cell configuration by using the
professional optimization analysis software ZXPOS CNA1 (UMTS Edition) and
the adjacent cell planning tools and combining the driving test data.
2) Call parameter adjustment
To improve the call success ratio, you must optimize parameters such as T300
and N300. By reducing the value of T300 and increasing the value of N300, you
can shorten the wait time and increase the retransmission count, thus improving
the call success ratio.
Table 8.5-1 Adjustment of Call Parameters
Parameter
Setting Before
Optimization
Setting After
Optimization
T300 D5000 D2000
N300 3 5

3) Handover parameters
263 263 263 263
If ping-pong handover occurs, you may increase the Hysteresis value of the 1A
event. If it is difficult to add the adjacent cell signal to the active set, you may
increase the value of Reporting Range Constant Hysteresis/2. The higher value,
the lower judgment threshold of the 1A event.
4) Inter-system handover
To handle subscriber access problems:
Specify that 3G subscribers all should preferentially access the 3G network and
be retained in the 3G network.
When a 3G UE hands over to the 2G system and completes the call, it should
immediately complete registration in the 3G network first.
A EG subscriber should not conduct cell reselection from WCDMA to GSM
unless it has gone out of the 3G network coverage.
A 3G subscriber should immediately initiate the cell reselection procedure from
GSM to 3G once it returns to the 3G network coverage.
5) Inner loop power control.
The power control step may be adjusted to a slightly larger value if the signal
intensity changes rapidly due to the complex radio environment.
4. Network capacity expansion solution
The following capacity expansion solution is available for the fine areas:
Add carriers
Add power amplifiers
Transmit diversity
Add RRUs
Multi-layer coverage
Add carriers
Replace the power
amplifiers
The capacity
increases by 48%
The capacity
increases by 34%
The capacity
increases by 50%
C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y
Initial Stage Middle Stage Late Middle Stage Late Stage
Network
Construction Phase

Fig. 8.5-14 V3 Series WCDMA Node B Equipment Expansion Roadmap

264 264 264 264
As the WCDMA network subscribers keep increasing, we can add a carrier to
the network.
If the number of subscribers increases again after a carrier is added, we can add
a power amplifier for each carrier.
If the number of subscribers still increases, then we need to deploy the third
carrier and replace the power amplifiers with those of larger power.
In places where subscribers are especially densely populated, the multi-layer cell
expansion solution is recommended if three 20W carriers still fail to meet the
capacity requirements, that is, use RF remote station equipment to construct
micro cells where the macro cell coverage effect is not ideal or subscribers are
highly centralized.
8.5.9 Implementation of the Optimization Plan
Complete adjustments for the optimization in accordance with the Optimization &
Adjustment Plan for the WCDMA Radio Network in XX Service Area, and output the
Optimization & Adjustment Records on the WCDMA Radio Network in XX Service
Area.
8.5.10 Optimization Effect Verification
After implementing the network optimization solution, verify if the network problems
have all been solved or if the network performance has been improved.
1. During optimization effect verification, first collect the network running data
and then analyze the collected data.
2. After implementing the optimization solution, assess the network performance
once again by analyzing the DT data, CQT data, OMC performance
measurement data, subscriber complaints, alarm data and other relevant data.
3. Compare the performance indexes of the network after the optimization with
those before the optimization to verify if the network problems have all been
solved or the network performance satisfies the requirements after the
optimization.
Note:
265 265 265 265
The network optimization workflow is also a process of testing -> analysis ->
assessment -> adjustment -> testing ->
8.5.11 Project Acceptance
Conduct the acceptance test on the performance indices of the optimized network
against the contract clauses. The test routes, test points, call mode and other relevant
contents of the acceptance test shall be set according to the contract or the principles
determined in the requirement analysis phase. In principle, the Customer shall
participate in the acceptance test.
8.5.12 Document Archiving
After optimization effect verification and project acceptance, it is necessary to submit
the Optimization Report on the Radio Network in XX Service Area and archive the
related documents/data.
The network optimization report shall cover these contents: Analysis and localization
of the found problems, the optimization measures taken, a comparison of the indices
before and after the optimization, and suggestions on the outstanding problems of the
network or subsequent construction of the network.

WCDMA Network Planning and Optimization Course

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

WCDMA Network Planning and Optimization Course

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

WO_100_E1 WCDMA wireless

Network Planning and Optimization

indicates hybrid service mean.

represents channel quadrature factor from the user j.

represents the average quadrature factor in a cell. Generally, it is 60% for

Вам также может понравиться